if 


iBi 


i^KSfirail 


i;::': ■■';,■:   ■:■''' 


■:■■■:■. 


George  Washington  Flowers 
Memorial  Collection 

DUKE  UNIVERSITY  LIBRARY 


ESTABLISHED  BV  THE 
FAMILY  OF 

COLONEL  FLOWERS 


.£   1/ 


M  ' 


__-;  I     "'  ._ 


'/;)'-:■''" 


7*  Co, 


£ 


T 

t 

' 

□ 

J-1 

£i^ 


--  <2   ! 

f^'Ccmyo-ny    I      5t/:  Cent;.:?  £_r 


- 


-*?1  &, 


^Company    !    Jg^&i 


1 


1 


•• 


Z  r  Lieut. Colonel 
M  Mpor 
Q.   QT  Master 
I      A, ■//„  taut 
S.M.  Sera* Mapr- 
'X.    FieUMutU: 

F.    Band  "Q.S.  ^Master Serf! 

23  Color  mid  aiuerd 
O    Tlliflit 'c/iuele 
&   Zr/?  aiude 


i  I   I   I   I   I   I    I   I    i    I    I   I   I  ITT 


:  I  I   I  I  M   I  i   i   i   i  i  i  i  i  i 


A     6 


I    I    I    I   I    I    1TTT 


I    I    i-l    I    I    I    I    I    M    I 


□  Captain 

□  JiVvt  Zi/"/ 

□  Second  Lieut 

□  Thud  r  if.u 

IS  Second  Sen ' 


'Plato, 


tffflfc 


El  JW#  & 


j%„-,7,  &£.« 


RIFLE 


AXD 


LIGHT  INFANTRY  TACTICS: 

FOR 

EXERCISE    A  N  D     M  A  N  (EC  Y  R  E  S 

OF 

PREPARED   UNDER   THE   DIRECTION    OF     THE     WAP.     DEPARTMENT, 

BY   BREVET-LIEUT.-COL.  TV.  J.  HARDEE,  .C 


SCHOOLS  OF  THE  SOLDIER  AND  COMPANY,  INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS, 

"BE  AHft  I  «WS8. 


^ 


NEW  ORLEANS: 
H.  P.  LATHEOP,  PRINTER,  74  MAGAZINE 

1861. 


-   War  Department, 

Match  29,   18 

The  system  of  Tactics  for  Light  Infantry  and  Riflemen,  pre- 
pared under  the  direction  of  the  War  Department  by  Breve'. 
Lieutenant  Colonel  William  J.  Hardee,  of  the  Cavalry,  having 
been  approved  by  the  President,  is  adopted  for  the  instruction  of 
he  troops  when  acting  as  Light  Infantry  or  Riflemen,  and,  under 
the  Act  of  May  12,  1820,  for  the  observance  of  the  Militia  when 

so  employed. 

JEFFERSON  DAVIS, 

Secretary    of    War, 


THE  FLOWERS  COLLECTION 


lie  an)i  % igjrf  $nfanirj)  Catties. 

T 

TITLE    FIRST. 


Article  First. 

Formation  of  a  Regiment  in  order  of  battle,  or  in  line. 

1.  A  Regiment  is  composed  of  ten  companies,  which  will  ha- 
fritually  »m  right  to  left,  in  the  following  order:  first, 
sixth,  fourth,  ninth,  third,  eighth,  fifth,  tenth,  seventh,  second,  ac- 
cording to  the  rank  o(  the  captains. 

2.  With  %  less  number  of  companies  the  same  principle  will 
be  observed,  viz:  the  fust  captain  will  command  Ihe  right  compa- 
ny, the  second  captain  the  left  company,  the  thiid  captain  the 
right  centre  con       ry,  and  so  on. 

3.  The  companies  thus  posted  will  be  designated  from  right  to 
left,  first  company,  second  company,  &c.  This  designation  will 
be  observed  in  the  manoeuvres. 

4.  The  fit  •  ompanies  on  the  right,  whatever  their  denom. 
ination,  will  form  the  first  division;  the  next  two  companies  the 
second  division  ;  and  so  on,  to  the  left. 

5.  Each  company  will  be  divided  into  two  equal  parts,  which 
will  be  designated  as  the  first  and  second  platoon,  counting  from 
the  right ;  and  each  platoon,  in  like  manner,  wdl  be?  subdivided 
into  two  sections. 

6.  In  all  exercises  and  manoeuvres,  every  regiment,  or  part  o' 
a  regiment,  composed  of  two  or  more  companies,  will  be  designa- 
ted as  a  battalion. 

7.  The  color,  with  a  guard  to  be  hereinafter  designated,  will  be 
posted  on  the  left  of  the  right  centre  battalion  company.  Thai 
company,  and  all  on  its  right,  will  be  denominated  the  right  wing 
of  the  battalion  ;  the    remaining  companies  the  left  wing. 

8.  The  formation  of  a  regiment  is  in  two  ranks  ;  and  each  com- 
pany will  be  formed  into  two  ranks,  in  the  following  manner  :  the 
corporals  will  be  posted  in  the  front  rank,  and  on  the  right  and 
left  of  platoon.?,  according  to  the  height ;  the  tallest  corporal  and 
the  tallest  man  will  form  the  first  file,  the  next  two  tallest  men  will 
form  the  second  file,  and  so  on  to  the  last  file,  which  will  be  com- 
posed of  t.  >st  corporal  and  the  shortest  man. 

9.  The  odd  mhI  even  files,  numbered  as  one,  two,  in  the  com- 


4  FORMATION  OF  TE&  BATTAL!n\. 

pany,  from  right  (u  left,  will  form  groups  of  four  men.,  who  will  be 
designated,  comrades  in  battle. 
*"to.  The  distance  from   one.    rank   to  another  will  be  thirteen 
inches,   measured  from  the  breasts  of  the    rear  rank  men  to  the 
backs  or  knapsacks  of  the  frunt  rank  men. 

11.  For  manoeuvring,  the  companies  of  a  battalion  will  always 
be  equalized,  by  transferring  men  from  the  strongest  to  the  weak- 
est companies. 

Posts  of  Company  Officers^  Sergeants  and  Corporals. 

12.  The  company  officers  and  sergeants  are  nine,  in  number, 
and  will  be  posted  in  the  following  manner: 

13.  The  captain  on  the  right  of  the  company  touching  with  the 
left  elbow. 

14.  The  first  scrgiant  in  the  rear  rank,  touching  with  the  left 
elbow,  and  covering  the  captain.  In  the  manoeuvres  he  will  be 
denominated  covering  serg  ant,  or  right  guide  of  the  company. 

15.  The  remaining  officers  and  sergeants  will  be  posted  as  file 
closers,  and  two  paces  behind  the  rear  rank. 

10.  The  first  lieutenant,  opposite  the  centre  of  the  fourth  section. 

17.  The  scemd  lieutenant,  opposite  the  centre  of  the  first  platoon. 

18.  The  third  lieutenant,  opposite  the  centre  of  the  second 
platoon. 

19.  The  second  sergeant,  opposite  the  second  file  from  the  left 
of  the  company.  In  the  manoeuvres  he  will  be  designated  left 
guide  of  the  company. 

20.  The  third  sergeant,  opposite  the  second  file  from  the  right 
of  the  second  platoon. 

21.  The  fourth  sergeant,  opposite  the  second  file  from  the 
left  of  the   11 1  st  platoon. 

22.  The  fifth  sergeant,  opposite  the  second  file  from  the  right  of 
the  first  platoon. 

23.  In  the  left  or  tenth  company  of  the  battalion,  the  second 
sergeant  will  be  posted  in  the  front  rank,  and  on  the  left  of  the 
battalion. 

24.  The  corporals  will  be  posted  in  the  front  rank,  as  prescri- 
bed No.  8. 

25.  Absent  officers  and  sergeants  will  be  replaced — officers  by 
sergeants,  and  sergeants  by  corporals.  The  colonel  may  detach 
a  first  lieutenant  from  one  company  to  command  another,  of  which 
both  the  captain  and  first  lieutenant  are  absent  ;  but  this  author- 
ity will  give  no  right  to  a  lieutenant  to  demand  to  be  so  detached. 

Posts  of  Field  Officers  and  Regimental  Staff. 

26.  The  field  officers,  colonel,  lieutenant  colonel  and  major, 
are  supposed  to  be  mounted,  and  on  active  service  shall  be 
on  horseback.  The  adjutant,  when  the  battalion  is  manceu- 
vering,  will  be  on  foot. 


FORMATION  OF  THE  BATTALION. 


27.  The  colonel  will  take  post  thirty  paces  in  rear  of  the  file 
closers,  and  opposite  the  centre  of  the  battalion.  Tnis  dis- 
tance will  be  reduced  whenever  there  is  a  reduction  in  the 
front  of  the  battalion. 

23.  The  lieutenant  colonel  and  the  major  will  be  opposite 
the  centres  of  the  right  and  left  wings  respectively,  and 
twelve  paces  in  rear  of  the  file  closers. 

20.  The  adjutant  and  sergeant  major  will  be  opposite  the 
right  and  left  of  the  battalion,  respectively,  and  eight  paces 
in  the  rear  of  the  file  closers. 

£0.  The  adjutant  and  sergeant  major  will  aid  the  lieutenant 
colonel  and  major,  respectively,  in  the  manoeuvres. 

31.  The  colonel,  if  absent,  will  be  replaced  by  the  lieutenant 
colonel,  and  the  latter  by  the  major.  If  all  t ho  field  i  fficers 
be  absent,  the' senior  captain  will  command,. the  battalion  ; 
but  if  either  he  present,  he  will  not  call  the  senior  captain  to 
act  as  held  officer,  except  in  case  of  evident  necessity. 

32.  The  quarter-master,  surgeon,  and  other  Staff  officers,  in 
one  rank,  on  the  left  of  the  colonel,  and  three  pates  in  his 
rear. 

S3.  Tie  rjiiavter-mastcr  sergeant,  on  a  line  with  the  front 
rank  of  the  field  music,  and  two  paces  on  the  right. 

Posts  of  Field  Music,  and  Bond. 

34.  The  buglers  will  be  drawn  up  in  four  ranks,  and  posted 
twelve  paces  io  rear  of  the  file  closers,  the  left  opposite  the 
centre  of  the  left  ccntry  company.  The  senior  principal 
musician  will  lie  two  paces  in  front  of  the  field  music,  and 
the  other  two  paces  in  the  rear. 

35.  The  regimental  band,  if  there  be  one,  will  be  drawn 
up  in  two  or  four  ranks,  according  to  its  numbers,  and  post- 
ed five  paces  in  rear  of  the  held  music,  having  one  of  the. 
principal  musicians  at  its  head. 

Color-guarJ. 

35.  In  each  battalion  the  color-guard  will  be  composed  of 
tight  corporals,  and  posted  on  the  left  of  the  right  centre 
company,  of  which  company,  for  the  time  beiug,  the  guard 
will  make  a  part. 

3G.  The  front  rank  will  be  composed  of  a  sergeant,  to  bo 
selected  by  the  colonel,  who  will  be  called,  for  the  time,  color- 
bearer,  with  the  two  ranking  corporals,  respectively,  on  his 
right  and  left  ;  the  rear  rank  will  be  composed  of  the  three 
corporals  next  in  rank  ;  and  the  three  remaining  corporals 
will  be  posted  in  their  rear,  and  on  the  line  of  tile  closer.'. 
The  left  guide  of  the  color-company,  when  these  three  last 
named  corporals  are  in  the  rank  of  file  closers,  will  be  imme- 
diately on  their  left. 


FORMATION  OF  THE  BATTALION'. 


38.  In  battalions  with  loss  than  five  companies  present, 
there  will  be  no  color-guard,  and  no  display  of  colors,  except 

it  may  be  at  reviews. 

39.  The  corporals  of  the  color-guard  will  be  selected  from 
those  most  distinguished  for  regularity  and  precision]  as 
well  in  their  positions  under  arms  as*  in  their  marching.  The 
latter  advantage,  and  ajusl  carriage  «f  the  person,  are  tol>»- 
more  particularly  sought  for  in  the  selection  of  the  color- 
dearer. 

General  Guides. 
There  will  I ■<■  two  general  guides  in  each  battalion,  se- 
lected, for  the  time,  by  the  colonel,  from  among  the  sergeants 
(other  than  first  sergeants)  the  most  distinguished  for  car- 
riage under  arms,  and  accuracy  in  marching. 

41.  These  sergeants  will  be  respectively  denominated,  in 
the  manoeuvres,  right  general  guide,  and  left  g  neral  guide,  and 
be  posted  in  the  line  of  file  closers  ;  the  first  in  rear  of  the 
right,  and  the  second  in  rear  of  the  left  flank  of  the  battalion. 

INSTRUCTION  OF  THE  BATTALION. 

12.  Every  commanding  officer  isresponsible  for  the  instruc- 
tion of  his  command.     He  will  assemble  the  officers  together 

for  theoretical  and  practical  instruction  as  often  as  he  may 
judge  necessary,  and  when  unable  to  attend  to  this  duty  in 
person,  it  will  be  discharged  by  the  officer  next  in  rank. 

43.  Captains  will  be  held  responsible  for  the  theoretical 
and  practical  instruction  of  their  non-commissioned  officers, 
and  the  adjutant  for  the  instruction  of  the  non-commissioned 
staff.  To  this  end,  they  will  require  these  tactics  to  be 
studied  and  recited  lesson  by  lesson  ;  and  when  instruction 
is  given  on  the  ground,  each  non-commissioned  officer,  as  he 
explains  a  movement,  should  be  required  to  put  it  into  prac- 
tical operation. 

4  I.  'flu-  non-commissioned  officers  should  also  be  practised 
in  giving  commands  EaSh  command,  in  a  lesson,  at  the  theo- 
retical instruction,  should  first  be  givenby  the  instructor,  and 
then  repeated,  in  succession,  by  the  non-commissioned  offi- 
cers, so  that  while  they  become  habituated  to  the  commands, 
uniformity  may  be  established  in  the  manner  of  giving  them. 

45.  ]n  the  school  of  the  soldier,  the  company  officers  will 
be  the  in:  1!  uctors  of  the  squads  ;  but  if  there  be  not  a  suffi- 
cient number  of  company  officers  present,  intelligent  ser- 
geants may  be  substituted  ;  and  two  or  three  squads,  undei 
sergeant  instructors,  be  superintended,  at  the  same  time,  by 
an  officer. 

46.  In  the  school  of  the  company,  the  lieutenant  colonel  and 
the  major,  under   tho  colonel,  will  be  the  principle  instructors, 


INSTRUCTION  OF  THE  BATTALION.      1 

substituting  frequently  the  captain  of  the  company,  and  some- 
times one  of  the  lieutenants  ;  the  substitute,  as  far  as  practica- 
ble, being  superintented  by  one  of  the  princincipaK 

47.  In  the  the  school  of  the  battalion,  the  brigadier  general 
may  constitute  himself  the  principal  instructor,  frequently  sub- 
stituting the  colonel  of  the  battalion,  sometimes  the  lieutenant 
colonel  or  major,  and  twice  or  thrice,  in  the  same  course  of  in- 
struction, each  of  the  three  senior  captains.  In  this  schooJ,  also, 
the  substitute  will  always,  if  practicable,  be  superintende  1  by  the 
brigadier  general  or  the  colonel,  or  (in  case  of  a  captain  being 
the  instructor,)  by  the  lieutenant  colonel  or  major. 

48.  Individual  instruction  being  the  basis  of  the  instruction 
of  companies,  on  which  that  of  the  regiment  depends,  and  the 
first  principles  having  the  greatest  influence  upon  this  indi- 
vidual instruction,  classes  of  recruitsshould.be  watched  with 
the  greatest  care. 

49.  Instructors  will  explain,  in  a  few  clear  and  precise 
words,  the  movements  to  be  executed  ;  and  not  to  overburden 
the  memory  of  the  men,  they  will  always  use  the  same  terms 
to  explain  the  same  principles. 

50.  They  should  often  join  example  to  precept,  should  keep 
up  the  attention  of  the  men    by  an  animated  tone,  and 
rapidly  from  one  movement  to  another,  as  soon  as  that  which 
they  command  has  been  executed  in  a  satisfactory  maimer. 

51.  The  sabre  bayonet  should  only  be  fixed  when  required 
to  be  used,  either  for  attack  or  defence;  the  exercises  and  ma- 
noeuvres will  be  executed  without  the  bayonet. 

52.  In  the  movements  which  require  the  bayonet  to  be  fixed, 
the  chief  of  the  battalion  will  cause  the  signal  to  fix  bayonet, 
to  be  sounded  ;  at  this  signal  the  men  will  fix  bayonets  with- 
out command,  and  immediately  replace  their  pieces  in  the 
position  they  were  before  the  signal. 

Instruction  of  Officers. 

53.  The  instruction  of  officers  can  be  perfected  only  by  joining 
theory  to  practice  The  colonel  will  often  practise  them  in 
marching  and  in  estimating  distances,  and  he  will  carefully  en- 
deavor to  cause  them  to  take  Bteps  equal  in  length  and  swiftness. 
They  will  also  be  exercised  in  the.  double  quick  step. 

54.  The  instruction  of  officers  will  include  all  the  Titles  in  this 
system  of  chill,  and  such  regulations  as  prescribe  their  duties  in 
peace  and  war. 

55.  Every  officer  will  make  himself  perfectly  acquainted  with 
the  bugle  signals^  and  should,  by  practice,  be  enabled,  if  neces- 
sary, to  sound  them.  This  knowledge,  so  necessary  in  general 
instruction,  becomes  of  vital  importance  on  actual  service  in  the 
iekL 


0  ■   OF  THE 


Instruction  of  Sergeants. 

discipline  and   efficiency  ol  a  company  mate 
i  mi  the  conduct  and  cjbaraci 

,  and  properly  instructed  in  all  the  duties  ap- 

Their  theoretical  instruction  should    include  the  School  of 

the  Soldier,  the  School  of  the  Company,   and  the    Drill  fur  Skir- 

-  •  know  nil  the  details 
cribiug  tl.-jir  duties  in  garrison  and  in 
ign. 

58.  The  elects  from  the  corporals  in  his  conqpany  those 
whom  he  judges  tit  to  be  admitted  to  the  theoretical  instruction  of. 
the  sergeants. 

Instruction  of  Corporals. 

59.  Their  theoretical  instruction  should  inc.ude  the  School  of 
the  Soldier,  and  such  regulations  as  prescribe  their  duties  in  gar- 
rison and  in  campaign. 

00.  The  captain  selects  from  his  company  a  few  privates,  who 
may  be  admitted  to  the  theoretical  instruction  of  the  corporals. 

61.  As  the  instruction  of  sergeants  and  corporals  is  intended 
principally  to  quality  them  for  the  instruction  of  the  privates,  they 
should  be  taught  not  only  to  execute,  but  to  explain  intelligibly 
every  thing  they  may  be  required  to  teach. 

COMMANDS. 

There  are  three  kinds. 

62.  The  command  of  caution,  which  is  attention. 

03.  The  preparatory  command,  which  indicates  the  movement 
which  is  to  be  executed. 

04.  The  command  of  execution,  such  as  march  or  halt,  or,  in 
the  manual  of  anus,  the  part  ot  command  which  causes  an  exe- 
cution. 

0.1.  The  tone  of  the  command  should  be  animated,  distinct, 
and  of  a  loudness  proportioned  to  the  number  ot  men  under  in- 
struction 

0(5.  The  command  attention  is  pronounced  at  the  top  of  the 
voice,  dwelling  on  the  last  syllable. 

07.  The  command  of  execution  will  be  pronounced  in  a  tone 
firm  and  brief. 

68.  The  commands  of  caution  and  the  preparatory  commands 
are.  herein  distinguished  by  italics,  those  of  execution  by  capita  r.s. 

69.  Those  preparatory  commands  which,  from  their  length,  are 
difficult  to  be  pronounced  at  once,  must  be  divided  into  two  or 
three  parts,  with  an  ascending  progression  in  the  tune  of  com- 
mand, but  always  in  such  a  manner  that  the  tone  of  execution 
may  be  more,  energetic  ami  elevated;  the  divisions  are  indicate.! 
by  a  hyphen.  The  parts  of  commands  which  are  placed  in  a 
parenthesis,  are  not  pronounced. 


TITLE    SECOND 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 

General  Rules  and  division  of  the  School  of  the  Sol 

1.  The  object  of  this  school  being  the  in<!i\ 
ive  instruction  of  the  recruits,  the  instructor  never  requires  a 
movement  to  be  executed  until  he  has  given  an  exact  explanation 
of  it ;  ami  he  executes,  himself,  the  movement  which  he  com- 
mands, so  as  to  join  example  to  precept,  lie  accustoms  the  re- 
cruit  to  take,  by  himself,  the  position  which  is  explained — teaches 
him  to  rectify  it  only  when  required  by  his  want  of  intelligence — 
and  sees  that  all  the  movements  are  performed  without  precip- 
itation. 

'«.'.  Each  movement  should  be  understood  before,  passing  to 
another.  After  they  have  tieen  properly  executed  in  the  older 
laid  down  in  each  lesson,  the  instructor  no  lunger  confines  himself 
to  that  order  ;  on  the  contrary,  he  should  change  it,  that  he  may 
judaic  of  the  intelligence  of  the  men. 

3.  The  instructor  allows  the  men  to  rest  at  the  end  of  each 
part  of  the  lessons,  and  ofienei,  it  he  thinks  proper,  e-pecially  at 
the  commencement ;    for  this  purpose  ho  commands  Rest. 

4.  At  the  command  Rest,  t!,e  soldier   is   no   longer  required  to 
rve  immobility,  or  to  remain  in   hi-  I         •  instructor 

wishes  merely  to  relieve  the  attention  of  the  recruit,  he  commands, 
in  i<lace — Kest;  the  soldier  is  then  not  required  to  preserve  his 
immobility,  but  he  always  keeps  one  of  his  feet  in  its  place. 

5.  When  the  instructor  wishes  to  commence  the  instruction,  he 
commands — Attention  ;  at  this  command,  the  soldier  takes  his 
position,  remains  motionless,  and  fixes  his  attention, 

6.  The  School  of  the  Soldier  will  be  divided  into  three  parts  : 
the  first,  comprehending  what  ought  to  be  taught  to  recruits  with- 
out aims  ;  the  second,  the  manual  of  arms,  the  loading  and  firings  ; 
the  third,  the  principles  of  alignment,  the  march  by  the  hunt,  the 
different  steps,  the  march  by  the  flank,  the  principles  of  wheeling, 
and  those  of  change  of  direction  ;  also,  long  marches  in  double 
quick  lime  and  the  run 

7.  Each   part  will  be  divided  into  lessons,  as  follows  : 

TART    FIRST. 

Lesson  1.  Position  of  the  soldier  without  arms  :  Eyes  right 
left  and  front. 

d  '2.   Facings-. 
m  3.  Principles  of  the  direct  atep,  in  common  and  quick 
time. 


10  0OL  OF  THE  SOLtflER. 

Lesson  4.  Priuciples  of  the  direct  step  ia  double  quick  time, 
and  the  run.  ' 

PART    SECOND. 

-on  1.  Principles  of  shouldered  arms. 

■'■n  2.  Manual  of  arms. 

:..  To  load  in  four  times,  and  at  will. 

Lesson  4.  Firings,  direct,  oblique,  by  file  and  by  rank. 

■wi  5.  To  fire  and  load,  kneeling  and  lying. 

Lesson  0.  Bayonet  exercise. 

PART  THIRD. 

Lesson  1.  Union  of  eight  or  twelve  men  for  instruction  in  the 
principles  of  alignment. 

Lesson  2.  The  direct  march,  the  oblique  march,  and  the  differ- 
ent steps. 

Lesson  3.  The  inarch  by  the  flank. 

Lesson  4.   Principles  of  wheeling  and  change  of  direction. 

Lesson  5.  Long  inarches  iu  double  quick  time,  and  the  run, 
'.villi  arms  and  knapsacks. 

PART  FIRST. 
8.  This  wiH  be  taught  if  practicable,  to  one  recruit  at  a  time- 
but  three  or  four  may  be  united  when  the  number  be  great, 
compared  with  that  of  the  instructors.  In  this  case,  the  recruits 
will  be  placed  in  a  single  rank,  at  one  pace  from  each  other.  Iu 
this  part,  the  recruits  will  be  without  arms. 

Lesson  I. 
Position  of  the  Soldier. 

0.  Heels  on  the  same  line,  us  near  each  other  as  the  con  for 
mation  of  the  man  will  permit  ; 

The  feet  turned  out  equally,  and  formmg  with  each  other 
something  less  than  a  right  angle  : 

The  knees  straight  without  si  illness  ; 

The  body  erect  on  the  hips,  inclining  a  little  forward  ; 

The  shoulders  square  and  falling  equally  ; 

The  arms  hanging  naturally  ; 

The  eibows  near  the  body  ; 

The  palm  of  the  hand  turned  a  little  to  the  front,  the  little  fJR- 
behind  the  seam  of  the  pantaloons  ; 

The  head  erect  aud  square  to  the  front,  without  constraint ; 

The  chin  near  the  stock,  without  covering  it  ; 

The  eyes  lixed  straight  to  the  front,  aud  striking  the  ground 
about  the  distance  of  fifteen  paces. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER.  11 

REMARKS  ON  THE  POSITION  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 

Heels  on  the  same  line  ; 

10.  Because,  if  one  were  in  rear  of  the  other,  the  shoulder  on 
that  side  would  be  thrown  Lack,  or  the  position  of  the  soldier 
would  be  constrained. 

Heels  more  or  less  closed  ; 

Because,  men  who  are  knock-kneed,  or  who  have  logs  with 
large  calves,  cannot,  without  constraint,  make  their  heels  touch 
while  standing. 

The  feet  equal///  turned  out,  and  not  forming  too  large  an  angle  ; 

Because,  if  one  foot  were  turned  out  more  than  the  other,  a 
•shoulder  would  be  deranged,  and  if  both  feet  be  too  much  turned 
out,  it  would  not  be  practicable  to  incline  the  upper  part  of  the 
body  forward  without  rendering  the  whole  position  unsteady. 

Knees  extended  without  stiffness  ; 

Because,  if  stiffened,  constraint  and  fatigue  would  be  unavoid- 
able. 

The  body  erect  on  the  hips  ; 

Because,  it  rives  equilibrium  to  the  position.  The  instructor 
will  observe  (hat  many  recruits  have  ihe  bad  habit  of  dropping 
a  shoulder,  of  drawing  in  a  side,  or  of  advancing  a  hip,  particu- 
larly the  right,  when  under  arras.  These  are  delects  he  will  labor 
to  correct. 

The  upper  pari  of  the  lody  inclining  for  tear  d  ; 

Because,  commonly,  recruits  are  disposed  to  do  the  reverse,  to 
project  the  belly,  and  throw  back  the  shoulders,  when  they  wish 
to  hold  themselves  erect,  from  which  result  great  inconvenience 
in  inarching.  The  habit  of  inclining  forward,  the  upper  part  of 
the  body  is  so  important  to  contract,  that  the  instructor  must 
enforce  it  at  the  beginning,  particularly  with  recruits  who  have. 
naturally  the  opposite  habit. 

Shoulders  square; 

Because,  if  the  shoulders  be  advanced  beyond  the  line  of  the 
breast,  and  the  b;  ck  arched  (the  defect  called  rund -shouldered, 
not  uncommon  among  recruits,^  the  man  cannot  align  himself, 
nor  use  his  piece  wi'h  address.  It  is  important,  then,  to  correct 
this  defect,  and  necessary  to  that  end  that  the  coat  should  set 
easy  about  the  shoulders  and  arm  pits  ;  but  in  collecting  this 
defect,  the  instmctor  will  take  care  that  the  shoulders  be  not 
thrown  too  much  to  the  rear,  which  would  cause  the  belly  to 
project,  and  the  small  of  the  back  to  be  curved. 


'  THE  SOLD] 

The  01  Rurally,  i  palm  of  thf 

';.'  lillll  finger*  behind  the  team 

equally  important  to  the  sfio 
•   man  from  occupying  more 
rank  than  is  necessary  use  of  the  they  have, 

moreover,  the  advantage  of  keeping  in  the  shoul 

The  face  straight  to  the  front,  and  without  con  ;tr  i  >   ; 
Because,  if  there  be  stiffness   in  the   latter  position,  it  would 
Communicate  itself  to  the  whole  of  the  .upper  part  of  the  body, 

embarrass  its  movements,  and  give  pain  and  rati 

Eyes  direct  to  the  front ; 

Because,  this  is  the  surest  means  of  maintaining  the  shoulders 
m  line — an  essential  object,  to  be  insisted  un  and  attained. 

11.  The  instructor  having  given  the  recruit  the  position  of  thfl 

soldier  without  arms,  will  now  teach  him  the  turning  of  the  head 
and  eyes.     lie  will  command  : 

] .  Eyes — Right.     2.  Front. 

12.  At  the  word  right,  the  recruit  will  turn  the  head  gently, 
so  as  to  bring  the  inner  corner  of  the  left  eye  in  a  line  with  the 
buttons  of  the  coat,  the  eyes  fixed  on  the  lino  of  the  eyes  of  the 
men  in,  or  supposed  to"  be  in,  the  same  rank. 

13.  At  the  second  command,  the  head  will  resume  the  direct 
or  habitual  position. 

14.  The  movement  of  Eyes — Left  will  lie  executed  by  inverse 
means. 

15.  The  instructor  will  take  particular  care  that  the  movement 
of  the  head  does  not  derange  the  squareness  of  the  shoulders, 
which  will  ha]  pen  if  the  movement  of  the  former  bo  to  i  sudden. 

16.  When  the  instructor  shall  wish  therecruitto  pass  from  the 
state  of  attention  to  that  of  ease,  he  will  command  : 

Rkst. 

17.  To  cause  a  resumption  of  the  habitual  position,  the  instruc* 
tor  will  command  : 

1.  Attention.    2.  Squad. 

18.  At  the  first  word,  the  recruit  will  fix  his  attention'  ;  at  the 
second,  he  will  resume  the  prescribed  position  and  steadiness. 

Lesson  II. 
Fad 

19.  Facing  to  the  right  and  left  will  be  executed  in  one  //'///• 
Or  pause.     Tin:  instructor  will  command  : 

1.  Squad.    2.  Might  (or  left)— Face. 

2D.  At  the  second  command,  raise  the  right  foot  slightly,  turn.. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER.  13 

on  the  left  heel,   raising  the  toes   a   little,  and  then   replace  the 
right  heel  by  the  side  of  the  left,  and  on  the  same  line. 

21.  The  full  face  to  the  rear  (or  front)will  be  executed  in  two 
times,  or  pauses.     The  instructor  will  command  : 

1.   Squad.    2.  About — Face. 

22.  (First  time.)  At  the  word  about,  the  recruit  will  turn  on 
the  left  heel,  bring  the  left  toe  to  the  front,  carry  the  right  fool 
to  the  r  ar,  tl  e  hollow  opposite  to,  and  full  throe  inches  from, 
the  left  heel,  the  feet  square  to  each  other. 

23.  {Second  lime.)  At  the  word  face,  the  recruit  will  turn  on 
both  heels,  raise  the  toes  a  little,  extend  the  hams,  face  to  the 
rear,  bringing,  at  the  tame  time,  the  right  heel  bv  the  side  of 
the  left. 

24.  The  instructor  will  take  care  that  these  motions  do  not 
derange  the  positon  of  the  body. 

Lessox   III. 
Principles  of  the  dir  :  , 

25.  The  length  of  the  direct  step,  or  pace,  in    common 

will  be  twenty-eight  inches,  reckoning   from  heel  to  heel,  and  in 
swiftness,  at  the  rate  of  ninety  in  a  mini 

26.  The  instructor,  seeing  the  recruit  confirmed  in  this  posi- 
tion will  explain  to  him  the 'principle  and  mechanism  of  this  step 
— placing  himself  six  or  seven  paces  from,  and  facing  to  the  re- 
cruit. He  will  himself  execute  slowly  the  step  in  the  way  of  il- 
lustration,   and  then    command  : 

»  ■ 

1.  Squad,  foricard.    2.   Common  time.    3.  Ma: 

27.  At  the  first  command,  the  recruit  will  throw  the  weight  of 
the  body  on  the  riixht  log  without  bending  the  left  knee. 

29.  At  the  third  command,  he  will  smartly,  but  without  a  jerk, 
carry  straight  forward  the  left  foot  twenty-eight  inches  from  the 
right,  the  sole  near  the  ground,  the  ham  extended,  the  toe  a  little 
depressed,  and,  as  also  the  knee,  slightly  turned  out;  he  will  at 
the  same  time,  throw  the  weight  of  the  body  lorward,  and  plant 
flat  the  left  foot,  without  shock,  precisely  at  the  distance  where  it 
rinds  itself  from  the.  right,  when  the  weight  of  the  body  is  brought 
forward,  the  whole  of  which  will  now  rest  on  the  advanced  foot. 
The  recruit  will  next,  in  like  manner,  advance  the  right  foot  and 
plant  it  as  above,  the  heel  twenty-eight  inches  from  the  heel  of 
the  left  foot,  and  thus  continue  to  march  without  crossing  the  legs, 
or  striking  the  one  against  the  other,  without  turning  the  shou]Jers, 
and  preserving  always  the  face  direct  to  the  front. 

29.  When  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  arrest  the  march,  he  will 
command  ; 

1.  Squad.     2.  Halt. 

30.  At  the  second  command,    which  will  .be  giyen  at   the  in- 


n  :00L  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 

slant  when  tidier  foot  is  coming  to  the  ground,  the  foot  in  th< 
will  be  brought  up,  and  planted  by  the    side  of  the  other  without 
shock- 

31.  The  instructor  will  indicate,  from  time  to  lime,  to  the  re- 
cruit,  the  cadence  of  the  step  by  giving  the  command  one  at  the 
instant  of  raising  the  loot,  and  iwo  at  the  instant  it  ought  to  be 
planted,  observing  Hie  cadence  of  ninety  steps  in  a  minute.  This 
method  will  contribute  greatly  to  impress  upon  the  mind  the  two 
motions  into  which  the  step  is  naturally  divided. 

32.  Common  time  will  be  employed  only  in  the  first  and  second 
parts  of  the.  School  of  the  Soldier.  As  soon  as  the  recruit  has 
acquired  steadiness,  baa  become  established  in  ihe  principles  of 
shouldered  arms,  and  in  the  mechanism,  length  and  swiftness  of 
the  step  in  common  time,  be  will  be  practised  only  in  quick  time, 
the  double  (pick  time,  and  the  run. 

33.  The  principles  of  the,  step  in  quick  time  arc  the  same  as 
for  common  lime,  but  its  swiftness  is  at  the  rate  of  one  hundred 
and  ten  steps  per  minute. 

34.  The  instructor  wishing  the  squad  to  march  in  quick  time, 
will  command : 

1.  Squad,  forward..    2.  March. 

Lesson  IV. 
Principles   of  the  Double  Quick  Step. 

35.  The  length  of  the  double  quick  step  is  thirty- three  inches, 
and  its  swiftness  at  the  rate  of  one  hundred  and  sixty-live  stops 
per  minute. 

36.  The  instructor  wishing  to  teach  the  recruits  the  principles 
and  mechanism  of  the  double  quick  step,  will  command  : 

1.  Double   Quick   Step.     2.  Maucit. 

37.  At  die  first  command  the  recruit  will  raise,  his  hands  to  a 
level  with  his  hips,  the  hands  closed,  the  nails  towards  the  body, 
the  elbows  to  the  rear. 

38.  At  the  second  command,  he  will  raise  to  the  front  his  left 
le"  bent,  in  order  to  give  to  the  knee  the  greatest  elevation,  the 
part  of  the  leg  between  the  knee  and  the  instep  vertical,  the  toe 
depressed;  he  will  then  replace  his  foot  in  its  former  position; 
with  the  right  leg  he  will  execute  what  has  just  been  prescribed 
for  the  left,  and  the  alternate  movement  of  the  legs  will  be  con-  ' 
linued  until  the  command  : 

1.  Squad.     2.  Halt. 

39.  At  the  second  command,  the  recruit  will  bring  the  foot 
which  is  raised  by  the  side  of  the  other,  and  dropping  at  the  same 
time  his  hands  by  his  side,  will  resume  the  position  of  the  soldier 
without  arms. 

40.  The  instructor  placing  himself  seven  or  eight  paces  from, 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER.  t. 

and  facing  the  recruit,  will  indicate  the  cadence  by  the  commands, 
one  and  two,  given  alternately  at  the  instant  each  foot  should  be 
brought  to  the  ground,  which  at  first  will  be  in  common  time,  but 
its  rapidity  will  be  gradually  augmented. 

41.  The  recruit  being  sufficiently  established  in  the  principles 
of  this  step,  the  intruder  will  command  . 

1.  Squad,    forward.     2.  Double  quick.     3  March. 

42.  At  tho  first  command,  the  recruit  will  throw  the  weight  o 
his  body  on  the  right  leg. 

43.  At  tho  second  command  he  will  place  his  arms  as  indica- 
ted No.  37 

44.  At  the  third  command,  he  will  carry  forward  the  left  foot, 
the  leg  slightly  bent,  the  knee  somewhat  raised — will  plant  his 
left  foot,  the  toe  first,  thirty- three  inches  from  the  right,  and  with 
the  right  foot  will  then  execute  what  has  just  been  prescribed  for 
the  left.  This  alternate  movement  of  the  legs  will  take  place  by 
throwing  the  weight  of  the  body  on  the  foot  that  is  planted,  and 
by  allowing  a  natural,  oscillatory  motion  to  the  arms. 

45.  The  double  quick  step  may  be  executed  with  different  de- 
grees of  swiftness.  Under  urgent  circumstances  the  cadence  of 
the  step  may  be  increased  to  one  hundred  and  eighty  per  minute. 
At  this  rate  a  distance  of  four  thousand  yards  would  be  passed 
over  in  about  twenty-five  minutes. 

46.  The  recruits  will  he  exercised  also  in  running. 

47.  The  principles  are  the  same  as  for  the  double  quick  step, 
the  only  difference  consisting  in  a  greater  degree  of  swiftness. 

48.  It  is  recommended  in  marching  at  double  quick  time,  or 
the  run,  that  the  men  should  breathe  as  much  as  possible  through 
the  nose,  keeping  the  mouth  closed.  Experience  has  proved  that, 
by  conforming  to  this  principle,  a  man  can  pass  over  a  much  lon- 
ger distance,  and  with  less  fatigue. 

PART  SECOND. 

GENERAL         RULES. 

49.  The  instructor  will  not  pass  the  men  to  this  second  part 
until  they  .-hall  be  well  established  in  the  position  of  the  body, 
and  in  i tie  manner  of  marching  at  the  different  steps. 

50.  He  will  then  unite  four  men,  whom  he  will  place  in  the 
same  rank,  elbow  to  elbow,  and  instruct  them  in  the  position  cf 
shouldered  aims,  as  follows: 

Lesson  I. 

Principles  of  Shouldered  A7~nis. 

51.  The  recruit  being  placed  as  explained  in  the  first  lesson  of 
the  first  part,  the  instructor  will  cause,  him  to  bend  the  right  arm 
slightly,  and  place  the  piece  in  it,  in  the  following  manner: 


16 


0 


The  piece  in  the  righi  band — the  I  ar- 
r  1  nearly  verti  -a!  and  resting  i  i  the  h  tllow 
of  the  shoulder — the  guard  \>>  tie  front,  the 
arm  hang  i  ly  at  its  full  I 

the  body;   the  thumb  and  jer  em- 

bracing the  guard,   the  remainin 

stock  just  under  the  cock,  which 
on  the  litl 

53.  Recruits  are  frequently  seen  with 
natural  delects  in  the  conformation  ( 
shoulders,  breast  and  hips.  These  the  in- 
structor will  labor  to  correct  in  the  lessons 
without  arm-,  and  afterwards,  by  steady 
endeavors,  so  that  the  nee  of  the 
pieces,  in  the  same  line,  may  be  uniform, 
and  this  without  constraint  to  the  n 
their  positions. 

54.  The  instructor  "will  have  occasion  to 

remark  that  recruits,  on  first  bearing1  arms,  are  liable  to  derange 
their  positions  by  lowering  the  right  shoulder  and  the  right  hand, 
or  by  sinking  the  hip  and  spreading  out  the  elb»  ws. 

55.  lie  will  be  careful  to  correct  all  these  faults  by  continually 
rectifying  the  position  ;  he  will  sometimes  lake  away  thi 
to  replace  it  the  better  ;  he  will  avoid  fatiguing  the  recruits  too 
much  in  the  beginning,  but  labor  by  degrees  to  render  this  posi- 
tion so  natural  and  easy  that  they  may  remain  in  it  a  long  timo 
without   fatigue. 

5i).  Finally,  the  instructor  will  take  great  care  that  the  piece, 
at  a  shoulder,  bo  not  carried  too  high  nor  too  low  ;  if  too  high, 
the  right  elbow  would  spread  out,  the  soldier  would  occupy  too 
much  space  in  his  rank,  and  the  piece  he  made  to  waver  ;  if  too 
low  the  files  would  be  too  much  closed,  the  soldier  would  not 
have  the  necessary  space  to  handle  his  piece  with  facility,  the 
right  arm  would  become  too  much  fatigued,  and  draw  down  tho 
shoulder. 

57.  The  instructor,  before  passing-  to  the  second  lesson,  will 
cause  to  be  repeated  the  movements  of  eyes  right,  left,  and  front, 
and  the  facings. 

Lesson  II. 

Manual  of  Arms. 

58.  The  manual  of  arms  will  be  taught  to  four  men,  placed  at 
first,  in  one  rank,   elbow  to  elbow,  and  afterwards  in  two  rankH. 

69.  Each  command  will  be  executed  in  one  time  (or  pause,) 
but  this  time  will  be  divided  into  motions,  the  better  to  mako 
known  the  mechanism. 

60.  the  rate    (or  swiftness)  of  each  motion,  in  the  mauual  of 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 


n 


turns,  with  the  exceptions  hereiu  indicated,  is  fixed  at  the  ninetieth  pr^i  of 
a  niinnte  ;  but  in  order  not  to  fatigue  the  attention,  the  instructor  will,  a: 
itirst,  look  more  particularly  to  the  execution  of  the  motions,  without  re 
•quiring  a  nice  observance  of  the  cadence,  to  which  ho  will  bring  the  re- 
cruits progressively,  and  after  they  shall  have  become  a  little familiariztd 
with  the  handling  of  the  piece. 

,61.  As  the  motions  relative  to  the  cartridge,  to  the  rammer,  and  to  the  fixing 
and  unfixing  of  the  bayonet,  cannot  bs  executed  at  the  rate  prescribed,  not 
even  with  a  uniform  swiftness,  th<*y  will  not  bo  subjected  to  that  cadence.  The 
instructor  will,  h  jwover,  labor  to  cause  these  motions  to  be  executed  with 
promptness,  and,  a-bove  all.  with  regularity. 

(?2.  The  last  syllable  cf  the  oomtrand  will  decide  the  brisk  execution  of  the 
first  motion  of  each  timo  (or  pause  )  The  commands  two,  three  and/our,  will 
decidathe  brisk  execution  of  the  other  motions.  As  soon  as  the  rocruiw  shall 
well  comprehend  the  positions  of  the  several  motions  of  a.  time,  they  will  ho 
tangh'.  to  execu'e  the  time  without  resting  on  its  different  mo'ions;  tho  mech- 
Hnism  of  the  timo  will  neverthe'ess  bo  observed,  as  well  as  to  give  a  perfect  utt- 
cf  ihe  pioco,  a3  to  avoi!  t!  isink    gof,  or  tiurring  over,  either  of  the  motions. 

63.  The  manunl  of  arms  will  he  t  iu<;ht  in  the  following  pro- 
gressiou  ;     The  instuic'or  will  command  : 

Support — A  bus.  (One  time  and  three  motions. ) 

64.  (First  motion)  Bring  the  piece,  with 
the  right  band,  perpendicularly  to  the  front  and 
between  the  eye;,  the  barrel  to  thereat';  seize 
the  piece  with  the  left  hand  at  the  lower  band, 
•raise  this  hand  as  hi^h  as  the  chin,  and  seize 
the  piece  at  the  s;ime  time  with  the  right  hand 
four  inches  below  the  cock. 

05  (ISrvond  motion.)  Turn  the  piece  with 
<he  right  hand,  the  barrel  to  the  front  ;  carry 
the  piece  to  the  le^t  shoulder,  and  pass  the  fore- 
arm  extended  on  the  breast  between  the  right 
hand  and  the  cock  ;  support  the  cock  against 
the  left  fore-arm,  the  left  hand  resting  on  the 
right  breast. 

66.  ( Third  motion.)  Drop  the  right  hand 
by  the  side. 

67.  When  the  instructor  may  wish  to  give 
repose  in  this  position,  he  will  command  : 

Rest. 

68.  At  this  command,  the  recruits  will  bring 
up  smartly  theright  hand  to  the   handle  of  the 

piece  (small  of  the  stock.)  when  they  will  not  be  required  to  pre- 
serve silence,  or  steadiness  cl  position. 

69.   When  the    instructor  may  wish  the    recruits    to  pass  from 
this  posUion  to  that  of  silence  and  steadines,  he  will  command  : 
1.  Attention.     2.  Squad. 
7 P.  At  the  second  word,   the  recruits  will  resume  the  position 
of  the  third  motion  of  support  arms. 
2 


18 


[OOL  OP  'I  I!!.  SOLDIER. 


Shoulder —  \  kms. 
One  time  and  three  motions. 

71.  (Firstma  the  piece  with  the  rijht  hand  under 
tnd  against  the  left  fore-arm  ;  seize  it  with  ih<»  loft  hand  at  thr 
lower  bund,  die  Ibumh  i     ended  ;  detach  the  piece  slightlv 

the  left  fore  arm  :!o:ig  th  \  stock. 

72.  (  v/ ■■  .. .)  Carry   the  piece  vertically   to  the  ri^li 
shoulder   with  boib   hands,  the  rammer  to  the  trout,  change  thr» 

■:'  the  right  hau  '  so  as  to  embrace  the 
d  with  the  ihun  I  re  fingor,  tiip  the  left 

hand  to  the  height  oi  the    houlder,  the  finger  in- 
tended and  joined,  the  right  arm  nearly  straight 

73.  (  Third  notion.)  Drop  the  left  hand  quickly 
by  the  sit  i 

Present — Arms. 

One  lime  and  tiro  motions. 

74.  (First  motion.)  With  the  right  hand  bring 
the  piece  erect  before  the  centre  of  the  body,  the 
rammer  to  the  front;  at  the  same  time  seize  th< 
piece  with  the  left  hand  ball-way  beiwee 
guide  sight  and  lower  band,  the  thumb  extended 
along  the  barrel  and  against  the  stock,  the  fori 
arm  horizontal  and  resting  against  tha  body,  the 
hard  as  high  as  the  elbow. 

75.  (Second  motion.)  Ura-p  the  small  of  the 
stock  with  the  right  hand  below  and  against  the 
guai  d. 

Shoulder — Ahms.     (One  time  and  t}co  motions.) 

7R.  (First  motion.)  Bring  the  piece  to  the  right 
shoulder,  at  the  some  time  change  the  position  ot' 
the  right  hand  so  as  to  embrace  the  guard  with  the 
thumb  and  forelinger,  slip  up  the  left  band  to  the 
height  of  the  shoulder,  the  lingers  extended  and 
joined,  the  right  arm  nearly  straight. 

77.  (Second  motion.)  Drop  the  left  hand  quickly 
by  the  side. 

Order — A  kms.     (One  time  and  two  motions-) 

79.  (First  motion.)  Seize  the  piece  briskly  with 
the  left  hand  n»ar  the  upper  band,  and  detach  it 
slightly  from  the  shoulder  with  the  right  hand  ; 
loosen  the  grasp  of  the  right  hand,  lower  the  piece 
with  the  bft,  reseize  the  piece  with  the  right  hand 
above  the  low<  r  band,  the  little  finger  in  rear  of  the 
barrel,  the  butt  about  f<air  inches  from  the  ground,  the  light  hand 
supported  against  the  hip,  drop  the  left  hand  by  the  side. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 


10- 


79.  (Secorid  motion.)  Let  the  piece  slip  through  the  right  hand 
to  thr*  ground  by  opening  slightly  the  fingers,  and  take  the  posi- 
tion about  to  be  described. 

Position  of  Order   Arms. 

HO.  The  hand  low,  the  barrel  between  the  thumb   and  fore-fin 
ger   extended  along  the  stock  ;   the  other    fingers    extended    and 
joined  ;  the  muzzle  about  two  inches  from  the  right  shoulder;    the 
rammer  in  front  ;  the  toe  (or  beak)  of  the  butt,   against,  and  in  a- 
line  vviih,  the  toe  of  the  right  loot,  the  bane]  perpendicular. 

8j.  When  the  instructor  may  wish  to  give  repose  in  this  posi- 
tion, he  will  command: 

Rest. 

82.  At  this  command,  the  recruits  will  not  be  required  to  pre- 
serve silence  or  steadiness. 

83.  When  the  instructor  may    wish  the  recruits    to  pass 
this  position  to  that  of  silence  and  steadiness,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Attention.     2.    Squad. 

84.  At  the  second  word,  the  recruits  will  resume  the  position 
or  order  arms. 

Shoulder — Arms.    (One  time  and  two  motions.) 

85.  (First  motion.)  Raise  the  piece  vertically  with  the  right 
hand  to  the  height  of  the  right  breast,  and  opposite  the  shoulder, 
the  elbow  close  to  the  body;  seize  the  piece  wLh  the  left  hand 
below  the  right,  and  drop  quickly  the  right  hand  to  grasp  the 
piece  at  the  swell  of  the  stock,  the  thumb  and  fore  finger  embra- 
cing the  guaf  I ;  press  the  piece  against  the  shoulder  with  the  left 
hand,  the  right  arm  nearly  straight. 

$6.  (Second  motion.)  Diop  the  left  hand  quickly  by  the  side. 

Load  in  nine  times. 
1".  Load.*    (One  time  and  one  motion.) 

87.  Grasp  the  piece  with  the  left  hand  as  high  as 
the  right  elbow,  and  bring  it  vertically  opposite  the 
middle  ol  the  body,  shift  the  right  hand  to  the  upper 
band,  place  the  butt  between  the  feet,  the  barrel  to 
the  front ;  seize  it  with  the  left  hand  near  the  muz- 
zle, wnich  should  be  three  inches  from  the  body  ; 
carry  the  right  hand  to  the  cartridge  box. 

2.  Handle — Cartridge.     (One  time,  one  motion.) 

88.  Seize  the  cartridge  With  the  thumb  and  net 
two  lingers,  and  place  it  between  the  teeth. 

3.  Tear — Cartridge.  (One  time  aiul  one  motion.) 
69.  Tear  the  paper  to  the  powder,  hold  the  cart- 


*Whenever  the  loadings  and  firings  are  to  be  executed,  the  instructor 
will  cause  the  cartridge  boxes  to  be  brought  to  the  front. 


•JO  SCHOOL  OF  TFFE  SOLDIER. 


ridge  upright  between  the  thumb  end  first  two  fingeis  near  the 
top  ;  in  this  position  place  it  in  front  of  and  near  the  muzzle — the 
Nack  of  the  band  to  the  front. 

4.   Charge — Cartrit>gk. 
One  time  and  one  motion. 

90.  Empty  the  powder  into  the  barrel ;  disengage  the  ball  from 
the  paper  wiih  the  right  hand  and  the  thumb  and  first  two  lin- 
gers of  the  left;  insert  it  into  the  bore,  the  poi -ted  end  upper- 
most, and  press  it  down  with  the  right  thumb;  seize  the  head  of 
the  rammer  with  the  thumb  and  fore  linger  of  tie  light  hand,  the 
other  /ingcrs  cloted,  the  elbows  near  the  body. 

T>.  Draw — Rammer. 

One  time  and  three  motions. 

91.  (First  motion.)  Half  di  aw  the  rammer  by  extending  the 
right  arm  ;  steady  it  in  this  position  with  the  left  th.imb  ;  grasp 
the  rammer  near  the  muzzle  with  th-  right  hand,  the  little  finger 
uppermost,  the  nails  to  the  front,  the  thumb  extended  along  the 
rammer. 

92.  (Seco7id  motion.)  Clear  the  rammer  from  the  pipes  by  again 
extending  the  arm  ;  the  rammer  in  tho  prolongation  of  the  pipes. 

93.  (Third  motion)  Turn  the  rammer,  the  little  end  of  tho 
rammer  passing  near  the  left  shoulder  :  place  the  head  of  the  ram- 
mer  on  the  ball,  the  back  of  the  hand  to  the  front. 

6.  Ram — Cartkidge. 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

94.  Insert  the  rammer  as  far  as  the  right,  and  steady  it  in  this 
position  with  the  thumb  of  the  left  hand  ;  seize  the  rammer  at  the 
small  end  with  the  thumb  and  fore-finger  ct  the  right  hand,  the 
back  of  the  hand  to  the  front ;  press  the  ball  home,  the  elbows 
near  the  body. 

7.  Return — Rammeb. 

(hie  time  and  three  -motions. 

95.  (First  motion.)  Draw  the  rammei  halfway  out,  and  steady 
it  in  this  position  with  the  left  thumb;  grasp  it  near  the  muzzle 
with  the  right  hand,  the  little  finger  uppermost,  tho  nails  to  the 
front,  the  thumb  along  '.he  rammer  ;  clear  the  rammer  from  the 
bore  by  extending  the  arm,  the  nails  to  the  front,  the  rammer  in 
the  prolongation  of  the  bote. 

96.  (Second  motion.)  Turn  the  lamn.er,  the  head  of  the  ram- 
mer passing  near  the  left  shoulder,  and  insert  it  in  the  pipes  until 
the  right  hand  reaches  the  muzzle,  the  nails  to  the  front. 

97.  ('third  motion.)  Force  the  rammer  home  by  placing  the 
little  finger  of  tho  right  hand  on  the  head  of  the  rammer;  pass 
the  left  hand  down  the  barrel  to  the  extent  of  tho  arm,  without 
depressing  the  shoulder* 


SCHOOL  O'F  THE  SOLDIER. 


21 


8.  Prime.* 
One  time  and  two  motions. 
99.  (Fiist  motion.)  With  the  left 
In  1  raise  the  piece  till  the  hand  is  as 
high  as  the  eye,  grasp  the  small  of  the 
stock  with  the  right  hand;  half  face  to 
the  ri^hl  ;  pace,  at  the  same  time,  the 
right  foot  behind  and  at  right  angles 
with  the  left ;  the  hollow  of  the  right 
fool  against  the  left  heel.  Slip  the  left 
band  down  lo  the  lower  band,  the 
thumb  along  the  stork,  the  lefc  elbow 
against  the  body,  bring  the  piece  to 
the.  right  side,  the  butt  below  (he  right 
fire-arm — the  small  of  the  ^tock  against 
the  bo  ly  and  two  inches  below  the 
light  breast,  the  barrel  upwards,  the  muzzle  on  a  level  with  the 
eye. 

!!0.  (Second  motion.)  Half  cock  with  the  thumb  of  the  right 
hand,  the  li.igers  supported  against  the  guard  and  the  pmall  of  the 
>tock — remove  the  old  cap  with  one  ot  the  lingers  of  the  right 
hand,  and  with  the  thumb  and  fore  Anger  of  the  same  hand  take 
a  cap  from  the  pouch,  place  it  on  the  nipple,  and  press  it  down 
•Aith  the  thumb;  seize  tho  small  of  the  stock  with  the  right  hand. 

9.  Shoulder — Arms. 
One  time  and  two  motions. 
100.. (First  motion.)  Bring  the  piece  to  the  right  shoulder  and 
support  it  there  with  the  left  hand,  face  to  the  trout ;  bring  the 
right  heel  to  the  side  o'l  and  on  a  line  with  the  left;  grasp  th». 
piece  with  the  right  hand  as  indicated  in  the  position  of  shoulder 
onus. 

101.  (Second  motion.)  Drop  the  left  hand  quickly  by  the  fide. 

Ready. 
One   time  cr.d  three  motions. 

102.  (First  motion.)  Raise  the  piece  slightly  with  the  right 
hand,  making  a  half  face  to  the  right  on  the  left  heel  ;  carry  the 
right  foot  to  the  rear,  and  place  it  at  right  angles  to  tho  left,  the 
hollow  of  it  opposite  tn,  and  against  the  left  heel  ;  grasp  the  uo<  < 
with  the  left  hand  at  the  lower  band  and  detach  i4,  sllgbily 
from  the  sh(  ulder. 


*If  Maynard's  primer  ba  used,  tho  command  will  be,  load  in  eight 
tines,  and  the  eighth  command  will  be,  sJ&ulder  arms,  and  ex&cuUd 
from  return  rammer,  in  one  and  two  motions  as  follows  : 

{First  moticnA  Raise  the  piece  with  the  left  hand,  and  take  the  f.o- 
silion  of  shoulder  arms  as  indicated  No.  76. 

fftamd  motion.)  Drop  the  left  hand  quickly  by  the  side. 


J-' 


L  OF  FHE  SOLDIER. 


103.  (Second  motion.)  Rring  down  the  pioce'with  both  hand--, 
n  ■!  upwards,  the  left  thumb  extended  along  the  stock,  the 
butt  below  ilio  ri uh t  fore-arm,  the  small  of  the  stock  ogain-<i  lii^ 
body  aNid  two  inches  below   the  right  breast,  the  muzzle  aa  ! 

as  i he  pye,  the  left  elbow  against  the  side;  place  at  the  same 
tiiie  the  right  thumb  on  the  head  of  the  cock,  the  other  fin.  « 
under  ist  the  g 

104.  (Third  at  the  simll 
of  the.  Btock  without  deranging  the-  position  of  the  butt. 

.Aijt.     ( Front  rank. ) 

One  time  and  one  motion,. 

]0.">.    Raise  the  piece  wiih  : 
hand--,  and  support  the  bntt  against 
the.  right  shoulder ;  ih  *  lefi  elbow 
down    the    right    as    high    as  the 
shoulder  ;   incline   the    head   upon 
the  butt,  sn  that  lite  riglll  eye 
perceive  quickly  the   notch  of  the 
hausse,  the  front  siyht,  and  the 
ject  aimed  at  ;   the  l<  ft  eye  closed, 
h-J  right  thumb  extfended  along  the 
stock,    the   fore  finger  on  the  trig- 
ger. 

30r).  When  recruits  are  formed 
in  two  ranks  to  execute  the  filing-, 
the  front  rank  men  will  raise  a  liitle  less  the  r'ght  elbow,  in  order 
*o  facilitate  the  aim  of  the  rear  rank  men, 

107  The  rear  rank  men, 
in  aiming,  will  each  carry  the 
right  foot  about  eight  inches  to 
the  ri-ht,  and  towards  the  left 
heel  of  the  man  next  on  the 
right,  inclining  :he  upper  part 
of  the  body  f<  rward. 
Fibb.  (One  /w,  one  motion.} 
10-5.  Press  the  fore  finger 
against  the  trigger,  fire,  with- 
out lowering  or  turning  the 
head,  and  it-main  in  this  posi- 
tion. 

109.  Ins'ructors  will  be  care- 
ful lo  observe  when  the  men 
tire  that  they  aim  at  sr  me  dis- 
tinct object,  and  'hat  the,  bar- 
rel be  so  directed  that  the  lino  cf  fire  and  the  line  of  sight  beinS 
the  same  vertical  plane.     They  will   often  cause  the  firing  I    be 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 


'•xecuu-d  on  ground  oi  dift  rent  incliuationi?,  in  order  to  accustom 
ike  men  to  lire  at  objects  either  above  or  below  them. 

Load. 
One  time  and  one  motion. 

110.  Bring  down  the  piece  with  both  ban  Is,  at  the  same   ttn> 
face  to   the  front  and  take    the    p  si  ion  of  load    ns  indicated  N< 
87.     Kach  rear  rank  in  in  will  bring  his  fight  foot  by  the    side  el 
the  left. 

111.  The  men  being  in  this  position,  th*?  instructor  will   c  . 
tho  loading  to  be  continued   by   the  commands  and  means  pr 
scr'b.'d  i\o.  87.  'in  I  following. 

112.  If,  after  Bring,  the  instructor  should  not  wish  the  recruits 
to  reload,  he  will  command  : 

Shoulder — Arms. 
Ons  time   and   one   motion. 

113.  Throw  up  tho  piece  briskly  with  the  lefi  hand  and  re- 
'the  position  of  shoulder  cr.ns,  at  the  same   time  fae*  to  the  from, 

turning  on  the  left  heel,  and  bring  the    right  heel  on  a   line    with 
the  left. 

114.  To  accustom  the  recruits  to  wait  for  the  command  fire. 
the  instructor,  when  they  arc  ia  tho  position  oi'  aim,  will  com- 
mand: 

Rccomr — Arms. 

(hie  tin.e   and  or.e  motion. 

115.  At  the  first  part  of  the   command,   withdraw    the    i 
from  tho  trigger;  a'  the  command  arms,  retake  the  position  of  the 
third  motion  of  re  idy. 

116.  The  recruits  being  in  the  position  of  the  third  mo'i*n  of 
ready,  if  the  instructor  should  wish  to  bring  them  to  a  shoulder, 
he  will  command : 

Siiotjldtcr — Arms. 

One    time  and  o>ie   viol  ion. 

117.  At  the  command  shoulder  place  the  thumb  upon  the  cock, 
the  fore-finger  on  the  trigger,  hnlr-cock,  and  seize  the  small  ol  the 
stock  with  the  right  hand.  At  the  command  arms,  bring  up  the 
piece  briskly  to  the  right  shoulder,  and  retake  the  position  of 
shoulder  arms. 

119.  '1  he  recruits  being  at  shoulder  arms,  when  the  instr 
shall  wish  to  fix  bayonets,  he   will  command  : 

Fix — Bayonet. 

One   time   and   thee    motions. 
119.  (First  motion.)  Grasp  the  p:ece  with  the  left  hand  at  '.re 
'height  ol  tho  shouider,  and  detach   it  slightly   from  the  sho:. 
with  the  riijht  hand. 


5)  HOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 


120.  (Second  motion.)    Quit  the   piece  with  tlio   right    ! 
:)\vi>r  it  with  the  left  band,   opposite  the  middle    of  the  body,   Rtid 
dace  the  butt  between  the  feet  without  shock;  the  rammer  to  thi* 

-••ar,  t he  barrel  vertical,  the  muzzle  three  inch''"  from  i lie  body  ; 
i  tize  it  with  the  right  hand  at  the  upper  band,  and  carry  the  loft 
hand  reversed  to  the  handle  of  the  sabre  bayonet. 

121.  (  Third  motion  )  Draw  the  sabre-bayonet  from  the  scab. 
[»ard  and  fix  it  on  the  extremity  of  the  barrel ;.  seize  the  piece 
\»ith  the  left  hand,  the  arm  extended,  the  right  hand  at  the  upper 
?>ind. 

Shoulder —  A  kms. 

One  time  and  two  motions. 

L22.  (First  motion.)  Raise  the  piece  with  the  left  band  and 
place  it  against  the  right  shoulder,  the  rammer  to  the.  front;  seize 
the  piece  at  the  same  time  with  the  right  hand  at  the  swell  of  the 
.-tock,  the  thumb  and  fore  finger  embracing  the  guard,  the  right 
arm  nearly  extended. 

KS3.  (Second  motion.)  Drop  briskly  the  left  hand  by  the  side. 

Charge — Bayonet. 

One  time  and  two  motion,- 

124.  (First,  mod  n.)  Raise. 

the    piece  slightly  with  the 

right  hand  and  make  a  half 

tac  •  to  the  right  on  the  left 

heel  ;  place    the  hollow    of 

the  right    foot    opposite    to, 

:md    three    inches  from  the 

left  heel,   the   feet    squarp : 

seize  the  piece  at  the  tame 

time    with  the  left  hand    a 

little  above  the  lower  bain!. 

125.  (Second  motion) — 

Bring  down  the  piece  with 

!  oth  hands,  the  barrel  uppermost,  the  left  elbow  against  the  body; 

s'.>7e  the  small  of  the  stock,  at   the   same   time,  with  the    right 

band,  winch  will  bo   supported  against  the  hip  ;  the  point  of  the 

'i-abre. bayonet  as  high  as  the  eye. 

Shoulder —  A  i;  U  s . 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

12&  (First  motion.)  Throw  up   the  piece  briskly  with  the  left 

hand  in  facing  to  the  front,  place  it  against  the  ri^ht  shoulder,  the 

rammer  to  4ba  front ;  turn   the  right  hand  so  as  to  embrace  the 

guard,  slide  the  left  hand  to  the  height  of  tho  shoulder,   the  rigU 

I  nearly  extended. 


SCHOOL  OF  THfi  SOLDIER. 


lb 


127.  {Second  motion.)  Drop  the  left  baud  smartly  by  the  side. 

Trail — Arms. 

One  time  and  two  motions'. 

129.  (First  motion'.y  The  same  as  the  first  motion  of  order 
arms. 

129.  {Second  motion  )  Incline  the  muzzle  slightly  to  the  fron', 
fhe  butt  to  the  rear  .and  about  four  inches  From  'he  ground.  The 
light  hand  support  ■<!  .  i  the  hip  w  iH  so  bold  the  piece  tb  t  the  rear 
rank  men  may  not  touch  with  their  bayonets  the  men  in  the  front 
rank. 

Shocldkh — Ahms. 

130.  At  the  command  shoulder,  raise  the  piece  perpendicularly 
in  the  right  hand,  the  little  finger  in  the  rear  of  the  barrel;  at  the 
command  arms,  ex<  cute  what  has  been  prescribed  for  the  shoulder 
from  the  position  of  order  arms. 

Unfix — Bayonet. 
One  time  and  three  motions. 

131.  (First  and  second  motions.)  The  same 
as  the  first  and  second  motions  o[fix  bayonet, 
except  that,  .-it  ihe  end  of  the  second  com- 
mand, the  thumb  of  ill*  rigbl  hand  will  bo 
placed  on  the  spring  of  ihe  sabre-bayonet.  Rod 
the  left  band  will  embrace  the  handle  of  the 
sabre-bayonet  and  the  barrel,  the  thumb  ex- 
tended along  the  blade. 
i 
132.  (Third  motion.)  Press  the  thumb  of 

the  right  hand  on  the  spring,  wrest  off  (1  8 
aabre-bayonet,  turn  it  to  the  right,  the  edge 
to  the  front,  lower  »he  guard  until  it  touches 
the  right  hand,  which  will  seise  the  back  and 
the  edge  of  the  blade  between  the  thumb  and  first  two  fingers,  the 
Mh^r  fingers  holding  the  piece  ;  change  the  position  of  the  hand 
without  quitting  the  handle,  return  the  sabie  !  ayonet  to  the  scab- 
bard, and  seize  the  piece  with  the  left  hand,  the  arm  extended. 

Shoulder — Aims. 

One  time  and  two  motions. 

133.  (First  motion.)  The  same  as  the  first  motion  from  fix 
bayonet,  No.  122. 

184.  (Second  motion  )  The  same  as  the  second  motion  front* 
£/.  bayonet,  No.  123, 


26 


s-  1I00L  OF  TUT,  SOLDIER. 


£<  cure — Arms. 

One  time  and  three  viotions. 

13".  (First  mo' ton.)  The  same  as  the  fir<t 
motion  ol si<p]  or,  <  rms,  No.  84  except  with  tho 
right  hand  cciizi"   the  piece  at  the  small  of  the 

13ft.  (yeovdmo'ion)  Turn  the  piece  with 
both  hands,  iln-  barrel  to  the  from  ;  bring  it 
opposite  ihe  tell  shoulder,  the  butt  against  the 
hip,  the  left  hand  at  the  lower  hand,  the  thumb 
:;;  high  a>  the  chin  and  extended  on  the  rammer; 
tie  piece  erect  an  I  c  J  <  t  "• 
the  left  fore-arm  a<jai  st  the  piece. 

137.  (Third  motion-)     Reverse    tl  •    piece, 
-  rass  it  under  the  h  f  aim,  ihe  left  hand  remain- 
ill  at  the  lower  hand,  the  thumb  <»n   'he    am  • 
mer  to  prevert  it  fro.))  sliding  out,  the  little   linger  resting  aga  u>i>t 
the  hip,  the  right  hand  lading  ;<t  the  i-ame  lime  !>_)  the  *ide. 
Shoulder — Asms. 
One  time  and  three  motions. 
139.  (First  mo'ion.)   Uaise    ih.3    piece    with  the  left    hand,  and 
«eize  it  with  the  right  hand  at  the  stnail  of  the  stuck.     The  piece, 
erect  and  detached  from  the  shoulder,  the  butt   against    the   hip, 
the  left  fore  arm  along  the  pit  c  . 

139.  (Setondmo  o>)  Ihe  same  as  the 
second  motion  ot  shoulier  arms  fiom  a 
svp]  on. 

140.  (Third  mo'ion.)  The  same  as  th« 
thiid  motion  of  shouldir  firms  jrom  a  svr- 
}ori. 

Right  shoulder  shift — An  sis. 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

141.  (First  mo'ion.)  I)<  lacii  the  piece 
perpendicularly  from  the  shoulder  with  th« 
right  hand,  and  seize  it  wi.h  the  left  be- 
tween the  lower  hand  and  guide  Bight,  raise 
the  piece,  the  It'll  hand  at  the  height  ofthe 
shoulder  and  lour  im  hes  from  it  .  place,  al 
the  frame  time,  the  righl  hand  on  the  butt, 
the  beak  between  the  fiist  two  lingers,  the 
other  two   lingers  under  the  bull  plate. 

112.  (  e  o.id  n.O'ion  )  Quit  ihe  piece 
with  the  lelt  hand,  laise  and  place  the  piece 
on  the  right  shoulder  with  the  right   baud* 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER.  21 


'■the  lock  pkte  upwards  ;  let  fall,  at  the  same  time,  the  leit  hand 
by  the  i.icio. 

Shoulder —  \iots. 

One  time  and  tv:o  motions. 

1  8  (First  tnotien.)  R»ise  the  piece  perpendicularly  by  ex- 
t-  rid  "g  the  nsl.t  !l,'m  '•»  '?s  full  length,  the  rammer  to  the  front, 
at  th^  same  time  seiz  •  the  piece  with  the  left  hand  between  the 
lower  band  and  guide  sight. 

144.  (Second  motion.)  Quit  the  butt  with  the  right  hand,  which 
will  immediately  embrace  the  guard,  lower  'he  piece  t  >  the  por- 
tion of  shoulder  arms  slide  up  the  left  hand  t<>  the  height  of  the 
shoulder,  the  fingers  extended  and  closed.  Drop  the  lelt  hand  by 
the  sWe. 

145.  The  men  being  rit  support  arms,  the  instructor  will  some- 
times cause  pieces  to  l>e  brought  to  the  right  shoulder.  To  thin 
effect)  rrb  will  command  : 

Right  shoulder  shift — Anns'. 
Our  time  ayid  two  motions. 

146.  (First  motion.)  S.'ize  the  piece  wi«h  (he  right  hand,  be- 
low and  near  the  left  lore-arm.  place  the  left  hind  under  the  butt, 
the  heel  of  the  butt  between  the  fir.-t  two  fingers. 

147  (Second  motion.)  Turn  the  piece  with  the  left  hand,  the 
lock  plate  upwards,  cany  it  to  t:ie  right  shoulder,  the  left  hand 
.still  boiling  the  butt,  the  muzzle  elevated  :  h->hl  the  piece  in  this 
position  and  place  the  right  hand  upon  the  butt  as  is  prescribed 
No.  Ill,  and  let  (all  the  left  hand  by  the  side. 

Support — A  KIT*. 
One  time  and  tioo  motions. 
143.  {First  motion.)  The  same  as  the  first  motion  of  shoulder 
arms.  No    143. 

149.  (Suond  mo''on  )  Torn  the  piece  with  both  hands,  the 
barrel  to  the  tront,  carry  it  opposite  the  left  shoulder,  slip  (he  ri<;ht 
hand  to  the  small  of  the  stock,  nlace  the  Left  fire-arm  extended  on 
the  breast  as  is  prescribed  No.  65,  and  let  fall  the  right  hand  by 
the  side. 

Arms — At  Will. 
Otte  time  and  one  motion. 
].")0.   At  this  command,  curry  the   piece  at  peasure  en   either 
shoulder,  with  one  or  both  hands,  the  m  zzle  elevated. 

Shoulder — A  i:ms. 
One  time,  and  one  mo'ion. 

151.  At  this  command,  retake  quickly  the  position  of  shoulder 
arm-*. 

152.  The  recruit6  being  at  ordered  arms,  when  the  instructor 


9S  [OOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 

>hall  wish  to  cause  the  pieces  to  be  placed  on  the  ground,  he  will 
rcmmand  : 

Ground—  Arms. 
One  lime  and  two  motions. 

153.  (First  motion  )  Turn  the  piece  with  the  right  hand,  th^ 
barrel  to  the  left,  at  the  same  time  seize  the  cartridge  hoi  with 
the  left  liaiid,  bend  the  body,  advance  the  left  fiw  t.  the  heel  oppo- 
site the  lower  ba.  d  ;  lay  the  piece  on  the  ground  with  the  right 
hand,  the  toe  of  the  butt  on  :i  line  with  the  right  too,  the  knei  r 
slightly  bent,  the  right  heel  raised. 

154.  (Second  mo' ion  )  Rise  up,  bring  the  left  foot  by  the  side 
of  the  right,  quit  the.  cartridge  box  with  the  left  hand,  and  drop 
the  hands  by. the  side.  9 

liaise — A  bus. 
One  lime  aixd  two  motions. 

155.  (First  motion.) 
Seize  the  cartridge  box 
with  the  left  hand,  bend 
the  body,  acvance  the 
left  foot  opposite  tho 
lower  band,  and  sei/> 
the  piece  with  the  right 
hand. 

156.  (Second mo' ion.) 
Raise  the  piece,  bring 
ing  the  left  loot  by  the 
side  of  the  right;  turn 
the  pl.ee  with  the  right  hand,  the  rammer  to  the  front;  at  the 
same  time  quit  the  cartridge  box  with  the  left  hand,  and  drop  tb.d 

hand  by  tho  side. 

Inspection  of  Arms. 

157  The  recruits  being  at  ordtrsd  arms,  and  having  the  sabre 
bayonet  in  the  scabbard,  if  the  instructor  wishes  to  cause  an  in- 
spection o£  arms,  ho  will  command  : 

Inspection — Aiuis. 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

158;  (First  motion.)  Seize  the  piece  with  the  left  hand  below 
and  near  the  upper  band,  carry  it  with  both  hands  opposite  the 
middle  of  the  body,  tho  butt  between  the  feet,  ihe  rammer  to  the 
rear,  the  barrel  vertical,  the  muzzle  about  three  incites  Irom  the 
bodv  ;  carry  the  left  hand  reversed  to  the  sabre-bayonet,  draw  it 
from  the  scabbard  and  fix  it  on  the  barrel  ;  grasp  the  piece  with 
the  left  hand  below  and  near  the  upper  band,  seize  the  rammer 
with  the  thumb  and  forefinger  of  the  right  hand  bent,  the  other 
lingers  closed. 

V.r»9.  (Second  motion.)     Draw  the  rammer  as  haa  been-ex- 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER.  29 

plained  in  loading,  and  let  it  j.';lide  to  the  bottom  of  the  bore,  re- 
place the  piece  with  the  left  hand  opposite  the  right  shoulder, 
and  retake  the  position  of  ordered  arms. 

160.  The  instructor  will  then  inspect  in  succession  the  piece 
of  each  recruit,  in  passing  along  the  front  of  tLe  rank.  Each,  as 
the  instructor  reaches  him,  will  raise  smartly  his  piece  with  hifl 
right  hand,  seiz^  it  with  the  left  between  the  lower  band  and 
juide  sight,  the  lock  to  the  front,  the  left  hand  at  the  height  of 
the  chin,  the  piece  opposite  to  the  left  eye  ;  the  instructor  wilt 
take  it  .with  the  right  hand  at  the  handle,  and,  after  inspecting  it, 
will  return  it  to  the  recruit,  who  w  H  re  b  it  back  with  the 
right  hand,  and  replace  it  in  th<*  position  of  ordered  arms. 

161.  When  the  instructor  shall  have  passed  him,  each  recruit 
will  retake  the  position  prescribed  at  the  command  inspection 
arms,  return  the  rammer,  and  resume  the  position  of  ordered  arms. 

162.  If,  instead  of  inspection  of  arm*,  the  instructor  should 
merely  wish  to  cause  bayonets  to  be  fixed,  he  will  command  : 

Fix — Bayonet. 

163.  Take  the  position  indicated,  No.  lo&,  fix  bayonets  as  has 
been  explained,  and  immediately  resume  the  position  of  ordered 
arms. 

164.  If  it  be  tl  e  wish  ( f  the  instructor,  after  firing,  to  ascer- 
tain whether  the  pieces  have  been  discharged,  ho  will  coniniautl: 

Spring — Rammers  . 

1G5.  Put  the  rammer  in  the  barrel  a.s  has  boon  explained 
above,  and  immediately  retake  the  position  of  ordered  arms. 

166.  The  instructor,  for  the  purpose  stated,  can  take  the  ram- 
mer by  the  small  end,  and  spring  it  in  the  barrel,  or  cause  each 
recruit  to  make  it  ring  in  the  barrel. 

167.  Each  recruit,  after  the  instructor  passes  him,  will  return 
rammer,  and  resume  the  position  of  ordered  arms. 

REMARKS  ON  THE  MANUAL  OF  ARMS. 

.168.  The  manual  of  arms  frequently  distorts  the  persons  of  re- 
cruits before  they  acquire  ease  ard  confidence  in  ihe  several  po- 
sitions. The  instructor  will  therefo  e  frequency  recur  to  ele- 
mentary principle.'  in  the  course  of  the  lessons. 

J69.  Recruits  are  also  extr.  mely  1  able  to  curve  the  sides  and 
back,  and  to  derange  the  shoulders,  especially  in  loa  iing.  Con- 
sequently, the  instructor  will  not  cause  them  to  dweh  too  long, 
at  a  time,  in  one  position. 

170.  When,  af.er  some  days  of  exerc'«e  in  the  manual  of  arms, 
ihe  four  men  shall  be  well  established  in  their  use,  the  instructor 
will  alwa)8  terminate  the  le?son  by  marching  the  men  for  some 
time  in  one  rank,  and  at  one  \  ace  apat,  in  common  and  quick 
time,  in  order  to  confirm  them  more  and  more  in  the  mechanism 


;jo  .  OF  Tin:  SOLD] 

of  the  will  al-o  teach  them  to  mirk,  time  and  to  chantr&- 

jh  will  bo  executed  in  the  Following  manner  : 
To  m 

171.  Tbe  four  men.marching  in  the  direct  step,  the  insti. 
aid  : 

I.  Mark         .     2.   Marhi. 

17  J.  At;'.  •    ■  .  which  will  be  given  at  the  in - 

.  foot  is  '  id.  the    recruits  will    ranks  a 

Bcmblance  of  marching,  b  lieels  I  y  the  -:.  I  ■  of  each 

other,  and  observing   the  cadence  of  the  step,  by   raising  each 

foot  alternately  without  a<  vanciag. 

173.  The  instructor  wishing  the  direct  step  to  be  resumed, 
■will  command  : 

1.  Forward,     2.  March. 

174.  At  the  seconi  command,  which  will  be  given  as  pro- 
hcribed  above,  the  recruits  will  retake  the  step  of  twenty-eight 
inches. 

To  change  step. 

175.  The  squad  being  in  march,  tbe  instructor  will  command: 

1.   Change  step.     2.  March. 

176.  At  the  second  command,  which  will  be  given  at  the  in- 
stant either  foot  is  coming  to  the  ground,  bring  the  foot  which 
is  in  rear  by  the  side  of  that,  which  is  in  front,  and  step  off 
again  with  the  foot  which  was  in  front. 

To  march  backwards. 

177.  The  instructor  wishing  the  squad  to  march  backward? 
will  command  : 

1.  Squad  backward.     2.  March. 

178.  At  the  second  comman  1,  liie  reciuits  will  step  off  smartly 
with  the  left  loot  fourteen  inches  to  the  rear,  reckoning  from 
heel  to  heel,  and  so  on  with  the  feet  in  succession  till  the  com- 
mand halt,  which  will  always  be  preceded  by  the  caution  squad. 
The  men  will  halt  at  this  command,  and  bring  back  the  foot  in 
front  by  the  side  of  the  other. 

179.  This  step  will  always  be  executed  in  quick  time. 

180.  The  instructor  will  bo  watchful  that  the  recruits  march 
rnraight  to  the  rear,  and  that  the  erect  position  of  tho  body  and 
iho  piece  be  not  deranged. 

Lesson  III. 
To  load  in  four  hm  % 

181.  Tho  object  of  this  lesson  is  to  prepare  the  recruits  to  load 
.it  will,  and  to  c  luse  them  to  distinguish  the  times  which  require 
the  greatest  regularity  and  attention,  such  as  charge  catridge,  ra-m 
zatrid-ye,  and  ^mne.     It  will  bo  divided  as  follows  : 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER.  3l 


182.  The  first  time  will  bo  executed  at  the  end  of  the  com- 
mand ;  the  three  others  at  the  commands,  two,  three,  and  four%. 

The  instructor  will  command  : 

1.  Load  in  four  limes.     2.  Load. 

183.  Execute  the  times  to  include  charge  catridge. 

Two. 

lU4t  Execute  the  time  to  include  ram  catridge 

Three. 

!  85.  Execute  the  times  to  include  prime 

Four. 

i  B6.  Exacuto  the  time  of  shoulder  art'is 

To  bid  at  iri!l.\ 

181.  The  iustrnctor  will  nextteacu  loading  at  will,  which  will 
be  execu  ed  as  loading  in  four  times,  but  continued,  and  without 
rearing  on  either  of  iho  times.     He  will  command  : 

1.  Load  at  toill.     2.   Load. 

188.  The  instructor  will  habituate  the  recruits,  by  degrees,  to 
load  with  the  greatest  possible  promptitude,  each  withoi  l  regula- 
ting himself  by  his  neighbor,  and  above  all,  without  waiting  foiv 
him. 

»Hf>.  The  cadence  prescribed  No-  60,  is  not  applicable  to  load- 
ing in  iour  times  or  al  will. 

Le3so?t  IV. 
Firings. 

1°0.  The  firings  are  direct  or  oblique,  and  will  be  executed  as 
follows  : 

The  direct  fire. 

101.  The  instructor  will  give  the  following  commands  : 
1.  Fire  by  squad.  2.  Squad.  3.  Ready.  4.  Ainr.  5.  Fire.  (i.  Load. 

192.  These  several  commands  will  be  executed  as  has  been 
prescribed  in  the  Manual  of  Arms.  At  the  third  C'lmma-id,  the 
men  will  come  to  the  position  of  ready  as  heretofore  explained. 
At  the  iourth  they  will  aim  according  to  the  rink  in  which  each 
may  find  himself  placed,  the  rear  rank  men  inclining  forward  a 
littlei  the  upper  part  of  the  body,  in  order  that  their  pieces  may 
icach  as  much  beyoid  the  front  rank  as  possible. 

1  93,  At  the  sixth  command)  they  will  load  their  pieces  and  re- 
turn  immediately  to  the,  position  of  ready. 

394.  The  instructor  will  recommence  the  firing  by  the  con:- 
wand  .- 

1.  Squad.  2.  Aim.  3.  Fire,   1.  Load, 


B2 


J95.  When  the  instructor  wishes  thy  firing  to  cease,  he    wiii 

command  ; 

C'tase  firing. 

196.  At  ibis  com  rand,  the  men  will  cease  firing,  but  will  load 
their  pieces  it'  unloaded,  and  af  or  wards  bring  them  to  a  shoulder. 

Oblique  firings. 

197.  The  ob'iq'.r-  I]  lie  executed  to  the  right  r.nd  left, 
and  by  the  same  mman  i  •  the  direct  ore,  with  this  single  dif- 
ference— the  command  aim  will  always  lie  preceded  Ly  the  cau- 
tion, right  or  leji  oblique. 

Position  of  the  two   ranks    in  the    obliqe    fire     to  the    right. 

l'JS.  At  the  command  ready,  the  two  ranks  will  execute  what 
ha->  been  prescribed  for  the  di  e<  I  i-"  . 

199  At  the  cautionary  (ommand,  right  oblique,  the  two  ranks 
will  throw  oack  the  right  shoulder  and  lu>..k  steadily  at  the  object 
to  be  bit. 

200.  At  the  command  ahn,  each  front  rank  man  will  aiin  to 
the  right  without  deranging  the  teet :  each  rear  rank  man  will 
advance  the  left  foot  abo.ut  eight  inches  towards  the  light  heel  of 
ihe  man  next  on  the  right  of  his  lile  leader,  and  aim  to  the  i 
inclining  the  upper  part  ol  the  body  forward  and  tending  a  little 
ihe  left  knee. 

Position   of  the  two   ranks  in   ihe  oblique  fire    to  the   left. 

201.  At  the  cautionary  command  left  oblique,  the  two  ranks 
will  throw  back  the  left  shoulder  and  look  steauly  at  the  object  to 
be  hit. 

•202.  At  the  command  aim,  the  front  rank  will  take  aim  to  the 
left  without  deranging  the  feetj  each  man  in  the  rear  rank  wilj 
advance  the  ri<jht  toot  about  eight  inches  towards  the  right  heel  of 
the  man  next  on  the  right  of  his  file  leader,  and  aim  to  the  left, 
inclining  the  upper  part  of  the  body  forward  ard  bending  a  little 
the  right  knee. 

203.  In  both  cases,  at  the  command  load,  the  men  of  each  rank 
will  come  to  the  position  of  load  as  prescribed  in  the  direct  firo  ; 
the  rear  rank  nun  bringing  back  the  foot  which  i.;  to  the  right 
and  front  by  the  bide  of  the  other.  Each  mau  will  continue  to 
load  as  if  isolated. 

To  fife  by  file. 

204.  The  fire  by  file  will  be  execrted  by  the  two  ranks,  the 
files  of  which  will  fire  successively,  an  I  without  regulating  on 
each  other,  except  for  the  first  (ire. 

205.  The  instructor  will  command  : 

j.  Fire  by  file.     2.  isquad.     3.  Rkadt     4.  Comxence  Fieino. 
200.     At  the  third  command,  the  two  two    ranks  will  take  the 
(position  prescribed  in  the  direct  fire. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER.  33 

207.  A.t  the  fourth  command,  the  file  on  the  right  will  aim  and 
fire  ;  the  rear  rank  man  in  aiming  will  take  the  position  indica- 
ted No.  107. 

208.  The  men  of  this  file  will  load  their  pieces  briskly  and 
fire  a  second  time;  re-load  and  fire  again,  and  so  on  in  continua- 
tion. 

209.  The  second  file  will  aim,  at  the  instant  the  first  brings 
down  pieces  to  re-load,  and  will  conform  in  all  respects  to  that 
which  has  just  been  prescribed  for  the  first  file. 

210.  After  the  first  fire,  the  front  and  rear  rank  men  will  not 
be  required  to  fire  at  the  same  time. 

211.  Each  man  after  loading,  will  return  to  the  position  of 
ready  and  continue  the  fire. 

212.  When  the  instructor  wishes  the  fire  to  cease,  he  wil! 
command. 

Cease — Firing. 

213.  At  this  command  the  men  will  cease  firing.  If  they 
have  fired,  they  will  load  their  pieces  and  bring  them  to  a  shoulder; 
if  at  the  position  of  ready,  they  will  half-cock  and  shoulder  arms. 
If  in  the  position  of  aim,  they  will  bring  down  their  pieces,  half- 
cock,  and  shoulder  arms. 

To  fire  by  rank. 

214.  The  fire  by  rank  will  be  executed  by  each  entire  rank,  al- 
ternately, i 

215.  The  instructor  will  command  : 

1.  Fire  by  rank.  2.  Squad.  3.  Ready.  4.  Rear  rank.  5.  Aim 
6.  Fire.  7.  Load. 

216.  At  the  third  command,  the  two  ranks  will  take  the  posi- 
tion of  ready,  as  prescribed  in  the  direct  fire. 

217.  At  the  seventh  command,  the  rear  rank  will  execute  that 
which  has  been  prescribed  in  the  direct  fire,  and  afterwards  take 
the  position  of  ready. 

218.  As  soon  as  the  instructor  sees  several  men  of  the  reai 
rank  in  the  position  of  ready,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Front  rank.  2.  Aim.  3.  Fire.  4.  Load. 

219.  At  these  commands,  the  men  in  the  front  rank  will  execute 
what  has  been  prescribed  for  the  rear  rank,  but  they  will  not  step 
off  with  the  right  foot. 

220.  The  instructor  will  recommence  the  firing  by  the  rear 
rank,  and  will  thus  continue  to  alternate  from  rank  to  rank,  until 
he  shall  wish  the  firing  to  cease,  when  he  will  command,  cease 
firing,  which  will  be  executed  as  heretofore  prescribed, 

3 


M 


SCHOOL   OF   THE  SOLDIER. 


Lesson  V 

To  fire  and  food  kneeling. 

221.  Id  this  exercise  the 
squad  will  In;  su|  posed  loaded 
and  drawn  up  in  ooe  rank. 
The  instruction  will  be   given 

to  each  man  ii  (tfvidi  ally,  with- 
out  times  -ii  motlons.ai  d  n  the 
following  man  er. 
222.   The  instructor  will  com- 
mand : 

Kirk  \m»  load  kjnbeling 
223.  At  this  command,  the  man  on  the  right  of  the  squad  will 
move  forward  three  paces  and  halt;  then  carry  he  right  toot  to 
the  rear  and  to  the  right  of  the  left  heel,  and  in  a  position  conve 
nient  for  placing  the  righl  knee  upon  the  ground  in  bending  the 
,'e:*t  lerr  ;  place  the  right  knee  upon  the  ground  ;  lower  the  piece, 
sft  tore  aim  .supported  upon  the  thigh  on  the  same  side,  the 
richt  Land  on  the  small  »l  the  stock,  the  bull  resting  on  the  right 
thigh,  the  left  hani  supporting  the  piece  near  the  lower  band 

224  lie  will  next  move  the  ri;_rht  leg  to  the  left  around  the 
knee  BUpporteJ  on  the  ground;  until  'hi-  leg  is  nearly  perpendic- 
ular to  the  direction  of  the  li-ii  foot,  and  thu-  -eat  himself  comfort- 
ably on  the  right  heel. 

225.  kaise  the  pi<  ce  with*the  righl  hand  and  support  it  with 
the  left,  holding  it  near    'he  Cower  band',  the  l.-li  elbow  resting  on 

he  lef  thiyh  near  the  knee;  seize  the  ammer  with  the  thumb,  the 
f.  re. linger  under  the  guard;  cock  and  seize  the  piece  at  the  small 
of  the  stock  ;  brinij  the  piece  i<>  th  ■  should  er,  aim  and  fire. 

226.  Bring  the  piece  down,  as,  soon  as  it  is  fired,  and  support  it 
with  the  leu  hand,  the  luit  resting  on  the  right  thigh  ;  cai.ry  the 
uiet.'e  to  the  rear,  rising  <>u  the  kne>>.  the  barrel  downwards,  tin- 
butt  resting  on  the  g  ound  ;  in  this  piMtittun  .-upj  oit.  the.  pier.- 
with  the  tett  band  at  the  upper  band,  draw  cariiidge  >vit,h, the  right 
and  load  ihe  piece,  ramming  Lhe  bail,  il  necessary,  with  both  hand*. 

22<i.  When  loaded,bring  the  piece  to  the  front  with  the  left  hand, 
which  holds  it  at  the  upper  baud  ;  seize  it  at  the  same  time  with 
the  right  hand  at  the  small  >f  the  slock  ;  turn  the  piece,  th-  liarre! 
uppermost  and  nearly  horizontal,  the  ieit  elbow  resting  on  the 
left  thigh  ;  half-cock,  remove  the  old  cap  and  prime,  rise,  and  re- 
turn to  the  ranks. 

•J28.  The  second  mai  will  then  bo  taught  what  has  just  been 
prescribed  for  the  first,  and  so  on  through  the  rem  under  of  the 
•squad. 

To  fire,  and  load  lying. 

229-  In  this  exercise  the  squad  will  be  in  one  rank  and  loade  I  ; 


SCHOOL   OF  THE   SOLDIER. 


35 


the  instruction    will  be  given    individually    and  without    times  or 
motions. 

230.  The  instructor  will  command  : 

Fire   and  load  lying. 

231.  At  this  command,  the  man  on  the  right  of  the  squad  will 
move  forward  three  paces  and  halt ;  he  will  then  bring  his  piece 
to  an  order,  drop  on  both  knees,  and  place  himself  on  the  ground 
flat  on  his  belly.  In  this  position  he  will  support  the  piece  nearly 
horizontal  with  the  le!l  hand,  holding  it  near  the  lower  band,  the 
butt  end  of  the  piece  and  the  left  elbow  resting  on  the  ground,  the 
barrel  uppermost ;  cock  the  piece  with  the  right  hand,  and  carry 
this  hand  to  the  small  of  the  stock  ;  raise  the  piece  with  both 
hands,  press  the  butt  against  the  shoulder,  and  resting  on  both  el- 
bows, aiyi  and  j?re. 

232.  As  jpon  as  he  has  fired,  bring  the  piece  down  and  turn 
upon  his  left  side,  still  resting  on  his  left  elbow  ;  bring  back  the 
piece  until  the  cock  is  opposite  his  breast,  the  butt  end  resting  on 
the  ground  ;  take  out  a  cartridge  with  the*  right  hand  ;  seize  the 
small  of  the  stock  with  this  hand,  holding  the  cartridge  with  the 
thumb  and  two  first  fingers  ;  he  will  then  throw  himself  on  his 
back,  still  holding  the  piece  with  both  hands  ;  carry  the  piece  to 
the  rear,  place  tlu>  butt  between  the  heels,  the  barrel  up,  the  muz- 
zle  elevateii.  In  this  position,  charge  cartridge,  draw  rammer, 
ram  cartridge,  and  return  rammer. 

233.  When  finished  loading,  the  man  will  turn  again  upon  his 
left  side,  remove  the  old  cap  and  prime,  then  raise  the  piece  verti- 
call}',  rise,  turn  about,  and  resume  his  position  in  the  ranks. 

234.  The  second  man  will  be  taught  what  has  just  been  pre- 
scribed for  the  first,  and  so  on  throughout  the  squad. 

Lesson  VI. — Bayonet  Exercise. 

235.  The  bayonet  exer- 
cise  in  this  book  will  be  con- 
fined to  two  movements,  the 
guard  against  injaniry,  and 
the  guard  against  cavalry. 
The  men  will  be  placed  in 
one  rank,  with  two  paces- 
interval,  and  being  at  shoul- 
der arms  the  instructor  will 
command  : 
1.  Guard  against  Infantry. 

2.  Guard. 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

236.  (First  motion.)  Make 
a  half  face  to  the  right, 
turning  on  both  heels,  the 


36  SCHOOL  OF  THE   SOLDIEPx. 

feet  square  to  each  other  ;  at  the  same  time  raise  the  piece  slight- 
ly, and  seize  it  with  the  left  hand  above  and  near  the  lower  band. 

237.  (Second  motion.)  Carry  the  right  foot  twenty  inches  per- 
pendicularly to  the  rear,  the  right  heel  on  the  prolongation  of  the 
left,  the  knees  slightly  bent,  the  weight  of  the  body  resting  equal- 
ly on  both  legs;  lower  the  piece  with  both  hands,  the  barrel  up- 
permost, the  left  elbow  against  the  body ;  seize  the  piece  at  the 
same  time  with  the  right  hand  at  the  small  of  the  stock,  the  arms 
falling  naturally,  the  point  of  the  bayonet  slightly  elevated. 

Shoulder' — An 
One  time   and   one   motion. 

238.  Throw  up  the  piece  with  the  left  hand,  and  place  it  against 
the  right  shoulder,  at  the  same  time  bring  the  right  heel  by  the 
side  of  the  left  and  face  to  the  front. 

1.  Guard  against  Cavalry.     2.  Guard.' 
One   time   and   two  motions. 

239.  Both  motions  the  same 
as  for  guard  against  infantry, 
except  that  the  right  "hand  will 
be  supported  against  the  hip, 
and  the  bayonet  held  at  the 
height  of  the  eye,  as  in  charge 
bayonet. 

Shoulder —  Arms. 
One  time  and.  one  motion. 

240.  Spring  up  the  piece  with 
the  left  hand  and  place  it  against 
the  right  shoulder,  at  the  same 
time  bring  the  right  heel  by  the 

side  of  the  left,  and  face  to  the  front. 

PART  THIRD. 

24  1.  When  the  recruits  are  well  established  in  the  principles 
and  mechanism  of  the  step,  the  position  of  the  body,  and  the  man- 
ual of  arms,  the  instructor  will  unite  eight  men,  at  least,  and 
twelve  men,  at  most,  in  order  to  teach  them  the  principles  of  align- 
ment,  the  principles  of  the  touch  of  elbows  in  marching  to  the 
front,  the  principles  of  the  march  by  the  flank,  wheeling  from  a 
halt,  wheeling  in  marching,  and  the  change  of  directio/i  to  the 
side  of  the  guide.  He  will  place  the  squad  in  one  rank  elbow  to 
elbow,  and  number  them  from  right  to  left. 


SCHOOL   OF  THE  SOLDIER.  31 

Lesson  I. 
Alignments. 

242.  The  instructor  will  at  first  teach  the  recruits  to  align 
themselves  man  by  man,  in  order  the  better  to  make  them  com* 
prehend  the  principles  of  alignment ;  to  this  end,  he  will  com- 
mand the  two  men  on  the  right  flank  to  march  two  paces  to  the 
front,  and  having  aligned  them,  he  will  caution  the  remainder  of 
the  squad  to  move  up,  as  they  may  be  successively  called,  each 
by  his  number,  and  align  themselves  successively  on  the  line  of 
the  first  two  men. 

243.  Each  recruit,  as  designated  by  his  number,  will  turn  the 
head  and  eyes  to  the  right  as  prescribed  in  the  firstvlesson  of  the 
first  part,  and  will  march  in  quick  time  two  paces  forward,  short- 
ening thq^ast,  so  as  to  find  himself  about  six  inches  behind  the 
new  alignment,  which  he  ought  never  to  pass  :  he  will  next  move 
up  steadily  by  steps  of  two  or  three  inches,  the  hams  extended, 
to  the  side  of  the  man  next  to  him  on.the  alignment,  so  that,  with- 
out deranging  the  head,  the  line  of  the  eyes,  or  that  of  the  should, 
ers,  he  may  find  himself  in  the  exact  line  of  his  neighbor,  whose 
elbow  he  will  lightly  touch  without  opening  his  own. 

244.  The  instructor  seeing  the  rank  well  aligned,  will  command: 

Front. 

245.  At  this,  the  recruits  will  turn  eyes  to  the  front,  and  re- 
main firm. 

246.  Alignments  to  the  left  will  be  executed  on  the  same  prin- 
ciples. 

247.  When  the  recruits  shall  have  thus  learned  to  align  them- 
selves man  by  man,  correctly,  and  without  groping  or  jostling, 
the  instructor  will  cause  the  entire  rank  to  align  itself  at  once  by 
the  command  : 

Jlight  (or  left) — Drkss. 

243.  At  this,  the  rank,  except  the  two  men  placed  in  advance, 
as  a  basis  of  alignment,  will  move  up  in  quick  time,  and  place 
themselves  on  the  new  line,  according  to  the  principles  prescribed 
No.  243. 

249.  The  instructor,  placed  five  or  six  paces  in  front,  and  fa- 
cing the  rank,  will  carefully  observe  that  the  principles  are  follow- 
ed, and  then  pass  to  the  flank  that  has  served  as  the  basis  to 
verify  the  alignment. 

250.  The  instructor  seeing  the  greater  number  of  the  rank 
aligned,  will  command — 

Front. 

251.  The  instructor  may  afterwards  order  this  or  that  file  for- 


38  SCHOOL   OF  THE   SOLDIER. 

To  march   to  the  front. 

256.  The  rank  being  correctly  aligned,  when  the  instructor 
shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  march  by  the  front,  he  will  place  a  well 
instructed  man  on  the  right  or  the  left,  according  to  the  side  on 
which  he  may  wish  the  guide  to  be,  and  command — 

1.  Squad,  forward.  2.  Guide  right,  (or  left.)     3.  March. 

257.  At  the  command  march,  the  rank  will  step  off  smartly 
with  the  left  foot ;  the  guide  will  take  care  to  march  straight  to 
the  front,  keeping  his  shoulders  always  in  a  square  with  that  line. 

258.  The  instructor  will  observe,  in  marching  to  the  front,  that 
the  men  touch    lightly  the  elbow  towards  the   side  of  the  guide ; 

ward  or  back,  designating  each  by  its  number.  The  file  or  files 
designated,  only,  will  slightly  turn  the  head  towards  t^  basis,  to 
judge  how  much  they  ought  to  move  up  or  back,  steadily  place 
themselves  on  the  line,  and  then  turn  eyes  to  the  front,  without  a 
particular  command  to  that  effect. 

252.  Alignments  to  the  rear  will  be  executed  on  the  same  prin- 
ciples, the  recruits  stepping  back  a  little  beyond  the  line,  and  then 
dressing  up  according  to  the  principles  prescribed  No  243,  the  in- 
structor commanding: 

Right  (or  left)    backward — Dkess. 

253.  After  each  alignment,  the  instructor  will  examine  the  po- 
sition  of  the  men,  and  cause  the  rank  to  come  to  ordered  arms, 
to  prevent  too  much  fatigue,  and  also  the  danger  of  negligence  at 
shouldered  arms. 

Lesson  II. 

254.  The  men  having  learned,  in  the  first  and  second  parts,  to 
march  with  steadiness  in  common  time,  and  to  take  steps  equal  in 
length  and  swiftness,  will  be  exercised  in  the  third  part  only  in 
quick  time,  double  quick  time  and  the  run ;  the  instructor 
will  cause  them  to  execute  successively,  at  these  different  gaits, 
the  march  to  the  front,  the  lacing  about  in  marching,  the  march 
by  the  flank,  the  wheels  at  a  halt  and  in  marching,  and  the 
changes  of  direction  to  the  side  of  the  guide. 

255.  The  instructor  will  inform  the  recruits  that  at  the  com- 
mand match,  they  will  always  move  off  in  quick  time,  unless  this 
command  should  be  preceded  by  that  of  double  quick. 

To  march  to  the  front. 

256.  Tho  rank  being  correctly  aligned,  when  the  instructor 


SCHOOL   OF  THE   SOLDIER.  39' 

shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  march  by  the  front,  he  will  place  a 
well  instructed  man  on  the  right  or  the  left,  according  to  the 
side  on  which  he  may  wish  the  guide  to  be,  and  command  : 

1.  Squad,  forward.     2.  Guide  right,  (or  left.     3.  March. 

257.  At  the  command  march,  the  rank  will  step  off  smartly 
with  the  left  foot ;  the  guide  will  take  care  to  march  straight  to 
the  front,  keeping  his  shoulders  always  in  a  square  with  that 
line. 

258.  The  instructor  will  observe, in  marching  to  the  front, that 
the  men  touch  lightly  the  elbow  towards  the  side  of  the  guide  ; 
that  they  do  not  open  out  the  left  elbow,  nor  the  right  arm;  that 
they  yield  to  pressure  coming  from  the  side  of  the  guide,  and  re- 
sist  that  coming  from  the  opposite  side  ;  that  they  recover  by  in- 
sensible degrees  the  slight  touch  of  the  elbow,  if  lost;  that  they 
maintain  the  head  direct  to  the  front,  no  matter  on  which  side  the 
guide  may  be  ;  and  if  found  before  or  behind  the  alignment,  that 
the  man  in  fault  corrects  himself  by  shortening  or  lengthening 
the  step,  by  degrees,  almost  insensible. 

259.  The  instructor  will  labor  to  cause  recruits  to  comurehend 
that  the  alignment  c:m  only  be  preserved,  in  marching,  by  the 
regularity  of  the  step,  the  touch  of  the  elbow,  and  the  mainte- 
nance of  the  shoulders  in  a  square  with  the  line  of  direction  , 
that  if,  for  example,  the  step  of  some  be  longer  than  that  of  others, 
or  if  some  march  faster  than  others,  a  separation  nf  rdhows,  and 
a  loss  of  the  alignment,  would  be  inevitable;  tha  '.(.-ing  re- 
quired that  the  head  should  be  direct  to  the  front)  they  do  not 
strictly  observe  the  touch  of  elbows,  it  would  be  impossible  for  an 
individual  to  judge  whether  he  marches  abreast  with  his  neighbor, 
or  not,  and  whether  there  be  not  an  interval  between  them. 

260.  The  impulsion  oflhe  quick  step  having  a  tendency  to 
make  men  too  easy  and  free  in  their  movements,  the  instructor 
will  be  careful  to  regulate  the  cadence  of  this  step,  and  to  habit- 
uate them  to  preserve  always  the  erectness  of  the  body,  and  the 
due  length  of  the  pace 

261.  The  men  being  well  established  in  the  principles  of  the 
direct  march,  the  instructor  will  exercise  them  in  marching  ob- 
liquely.    The  rank  being  in  march,  the  instructor  will  command: 

1.   Right  (or  left)  oblique.     '2.    March. 

262.  At  the  second  command,  each  man  will  make  a  half  face 
to  the  right  (or  left.)  and  will  then  march  straight  forward  in  the 
new  direction.  As  the  men  no  longer  touch  elbows  they  will 
glance  along  the  shoulders  of  the  nearest  files,  towards  the  side 
to  which  they  are  obliquing,  and  will  regulate  their  steps  so  that 
the  shoulders  shall  always  be  behind  that  of  their  next  neighbor 
on  that  side,  and  that  his  head  shall  conceal  the  heads  of  the  other 


40  SCHOOL   OF   THE   SOLDIER. 


men  in   the  rank.     Besides  this,  the  men  should  preserve   the 
same  length  ot  pace,  and  the  same  degree  of  obliquity. 

263.  The  instructor  wishing  to  resume  the  primitive  direction, 
will  command — 

1.  Forward.     2.  March. 

264.  At  the  second  command,  each  man  will  make  a  half  face 
to  the  left  (or  right)  and  all  will  then  march  straight  to  the  front, 
conforming  to  the  principles  of  the  direct  march. 

To  march   to   the  front   in   double  quick   time. 

265.  When  the  several  principles,  heretofore  explained,  have 
become  familiar  to  the  recruits,  and  they  shall  be  well  established 
in  the  position  of  the  body,  the  bearing  of  arms,  and  the  mechan- 
ism, length,  and  swiftness  of  the  step,  the  instructor  will  pass 
them  from  quick  to  double  quick  time,  and  the  reverse,  gbserving 
not  to  make  them  march  obliquely  in  double  quick  time,  till  they 
are  well  established  in  the  cadence  of  the  step. 

266.  The  squad  being  at  a  march  in  quick  time,  the  instructor 
will  command — 

1.  Double   quick.     2.  March. 

267.  At  the  command  march,  which  will  be  given  when  eitrar 
foot  is  coming  to  the  ground,  the  squad  will  step  off  in  double 
quick  time.  The  men  will  endeavor  to  follow  the  principles  laid 
down  in  the  first  part  of  this  book,  and  to  preserve  the  alignment. 

268.  When  the  instructor  wishes  the  squad  to  resume  the  step 
in  quick  time,  he  will  command — 

1.    Quick    tune.     %  March. 

269.  At  the  command  march,  which  will  be  given  when  either 
foot  is  coming  to  the  ground,  the  squad  will  retake  the  step  in 
quick  time. 

270.  The  squad  being  in  march,  the  instructor  will  halt  it  by 
the  commands  and  means  prescribed  Nos.  29  and  30.  The  com- 
mand halt,  will  be  given  an  instant  before  the  foot  is  ready  to  be 
placed  on  the  ground. 

271.  The  squad  being  in  march  in  double  quick  time,  the  in- 
structor will  occasionally  cause  it  to  mark  time  by  the  commands 
prescribed  No.  171.  The  men  will  then  mark  double  quick  time, 
without  altering  the  cadence  of  the  step.  He  will  also  cause 
them  to  pass  from  the  direct  to  the  oblique  step,  and  reciprocally, 
conforming  to  what  has  been  prescribed  No.  261,   and  following. 

272.  The  squad  being  at  a  halt,  the  instructor  will  cause  it  to 
march  in  double  quick  time,  by  preceding  the  command  march, 
by  double  quick. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER.  41 


273.  The  instructor  will  endeavor  to  regulate  well  the  cadence 
of  this  step. 

To  face  about  in  marching. 

274.  If  the  squad  be  marching  in  quick,  or  double  quick  time,, 
and  the  instructor  should  wish  to  march  it  in  retreat,  he  will  com- 
mand— 

1.  Squad  right  about.    2.  March. 

275.  At  the  command  march,  which  will  be  given  at  the  in- 
stant the  left  foot  is  coming  to  the  ground,  the  recruit  will  bring 
this  foot  to  the  ground,  and  turning  on  it,  will  face  to  the  rear;  he 
will  then  place  the  right  foot  in  the  new  direction,  and  step  off 
with  the  left  foot. 

To  march   backwards. 

276.  The  squad  being  at  a  halt,  if  the  instructor  should  wish  to 
march  it  in  the  back  step,  he  will  command : 

1.  Squad  bachoard.     2.  Guide  left  (or  right.)     '■'>.  March. 

277.  The  back  step  will  be  executed  by  the  means  prescribed 
No.  178. 

278.  The  instructor,  in  this  step,  will  be  watchful  that  the  men 
do  not  lean  on  each  other. 

279.  As  the  march  to  the  front  in  quick  time  should  only  be 
executed  at  shouldered  arms,  the  instructor,  in  order  not  to  fatigue 
the  men  too  much,  and  also  to  prevent  negligence  in  gait  and  po- 
sition, will  halt  the  squad  from  time  to  time,  and  cause  arms  to  be 
ordered. 

280.  In  marching  at  double  quick  time,  the  men  will  always 
carry  their  pieces  on  the  right  shoulder,  or  at  a  trail.  This  rule 
is  general. 

281.  If  the  instructor  shall  wish  the  pieces  carried  at  a  trail, 
he  will  give  the  command  trail  arms,  before  the  command  double 
quick.  If,  on  the  contrary,  this  command  be  not  given,  the  men 
will  shift  their  pieces  to  the  right  shoulder  at  the  command  double 
quick.  In  either  case,  at  the  command  halt,  the  men  will  bring 
their  pieces  to  the  position  of  shoulder  arms.   This  rule  is  general. 

Lesson    III. 
To  march  by  the  flank. 

282.  The  rank  being  at  a  halt,  and  correctly  aligned,  the  in- 
structor will  command — 

I.  Squad,  right — Face.     2.  Forward.     3.  March. 

2?3.  At  the  last  part  of  the  first  command,  the  rank  will  face 
to  the  right ;  the  even  numbered  men,  after  facing  to  the  right, 
will  step  quickly  to  the  right  side  of  the  odd  numbered  men,  the 


42  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 


latter  standing  fast,  so  that  when    the    movement  is  executed,  the 
men  will  be  formed  into  files  of  two  men  abreast. 

284.  At  the  third  command,  the  squad  will  step  off  smartly 
with  the  left  foot  ;  the  files  keeping  aligned,  and  preserving  their 
intervals. 

285.  The  march  by  (he  left  flank  will  be  executed  by  the  same 
commands,  substituting  the  word  left  for  right,  and  by  inverse 
means;  in  this  case,  the  even  numbered  me  ,  after  facing  to  the 
left,  will  stand  fast,  and  the  odd  numbered  will  place  themselves 
on  their  left. 

286.  The  instructor  will  plac-  a  well  instructed  soldier  by  the 
Bide  of  the  recruit  who  is  ;it  the  head  of  the.  rank,  to  regulate  the 
step,  and  to  conduct  him  ;  and  it  will  be  enjoined  on  this  recruit 
to  march  always  elbow  to  elbow  with  the  soldier. 

287.  The  instructor  will  cause  to  be  observed  in  the  march, 
by  the  flank,  the  following  rules : 

Tliat  the  step  be  executed  according  to  the  principles  prescribed  for  the 
direct  step; 

Because  these  principles,  without  which,  men  placed  elbow  to 
elbow,  in  the  same  rank,  cannot  preserve  unity  and  harmony  of 
movement,  are  of  a  more  necessary  observance  in  marching  in  file. 

Tliat  the  head  of  the  man  who  immediately  precedes,  covers  the  heads  of 
all  who  are  in  front ; 

Because  it  is  the  most  certain  rule  by  which  each  man  may 
maintain  himself  in  the  exact  line  of  the  file. 

288.  The  instructor  will  place  himself  habitually  live  or  six 
paces  on  the  flank  ot  the  rank  marching  in  file,  to  watch  over  tin- 
execution  of  the  principles  prescribed  above.  He  will  also  place 
himself  sometimes  in  its  rear,  halt,  anil  sutler  it  to  pass  fifteen  or 
twenty  paces,  the  better  to  sec  whether  the  men  cover  each  ol  (in- 
accurately. 

289.  When  he  shall  wish  to  halt  the  rank,  inarching  by  the 
flank,  and  to  cause  it  to  face  to  the  front,  he  will  command; 

1.  Squad.     2.  Halt.     '•$.    Front. 

290.  At  the  second  command,  the  rank  will  halt,  and  after- 
wards no  man  will  stir,  although  he  may  have  lost  his  distance. 
This  prohibition  is  necessary,  to  habituate  the  men  to  a  constant 
preservation  of  their  distances. 

291.  At  the  third  command,  each  man  will  front  by  facing  to 
the  left,  if  marching  by  the  right  flank,  and  by  a  face  to  the  right, 
if  marching  by  the  left  flank.  The  rear  rank  men  will  at  the 
same  time  move  quickly  into  their  places,  so  as  to  form  the  squad 
again  into  one  rank. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER.  43 

, ■        , 

292.  When  the  men  have  become  accustomed  to  marching  by 
the  flank,  the  instructor  will  cause  them  to  change  direction  by 
file  ;  for  this  purpose,  he  will  command  : 

1.  By  left  file  (or  right.)     2.  March. 

29*.  At  the  command  march,  the  first  file  will  change  direc- 
tion to  the  left  (or  right)  in  describing  a  small  arc  of  a  circle,  and 
will  then  march  straight  forward;  the  two  men  of  (his  file,  in 
wheeling,  will  keep  up  the  touch  of  the  elbows,  and  the  man  on 
the  side  to  which  the  wheel  is  made,  will  shorten  the  first  three 
or  four  steps.  Each  file  will  come  successively  to  wheel  on  the 
same  spot  where  that  which  preceded  it  wheeled. 

294.  The  instructor  will  also  cause  the  squad  to  face  by  the 
right  or  left  flank  in  marching,  and  for  this  purpose  will  command  : 

1.  Squad  by  (he  right  (or  left)  flank.     2.  Makch. 

395.  At  the  second  command,  which  will  be  given  a  little  be- 
fore either  foot  comes 'to  the  ground,  the  recruits  will  turn  the 
body,  plant  the  foot  that  is  raised  in  the  new  direction,  and  step 
off"  with  the  other  foot  without  altering  the  cadence  of  the  step: 
the  men  will  double  or  undouble  rapidly. 

296.  If,  in  facing  by  the  right  or  the  left  flank,  the  squad  should 
face  to  the  rear,  the  men  will  come  into  one  rank,  agreeably  to 
the  principles  indicated  No.  291.  It  is  to  be  remarked  that  it  is 
the  men  who  are  in  rear  who  always  move  up  to  form  into  single 
rank,  and  in  such  manner  as  never  to  invert  the  order  of  the  num- 
bers in  the  rank. 

297.  If,  when  the  squad  has  been  faced  to  the  rear,  the  instruc- 
tor  should  cause  it  to  face  by  the  left  flank,  it  is  the  even  numbers 
who  will  double  by  moving  to  the  left  of  the  odd  numbers  ;  but  if 
by  the  right  flank,  it  is  the  odd  numbers  who  will  double  to  the 
right  of  the  even  numbers. 

298.  This  lesson,  like  the  preceding  one,  will  be  practised 
with  pieces  at  a  shoulder;  but  the  instructor  may,  to  give  relief 
by  change,  occasionally  order  support  arms,  and  he  will  require 
of  the  recruits  marching  in  this  position,  as  much  regularity  as  in 
the  former. 

To  march  by  the  flank  in  double  quick  time. 

299.  The  principles  of  the  march  by  the  flank  in  double  quick 
time,  are  the  same  as  in  quick  time.  The  instructor  will  give 
the  commands  prescribed  No.  282,  taking  care  always  to  give 
the  command  double  quick  before  that  oi  march. 

30u.  He  will  pay  the  greatest  attention  to  the  cadence  of  the 
step. 

301.  The  instructor  will  cause  the  change  of  direction,  and  the 


44  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 

march  by  the  flank,  to  be  executed  in  double  quick  time,  by  the 
same  commands,  and  according  to  the  same  principles,  as  in  quick 
time. 

302.  The  instructor  will  cause  the  pieces  to  be  carried  either 
on  the  right  shouldc?  or  at  a  trail. 

303.  The  instructor  will  sometimes  march  the  squad  by  the 
flank,  without  doubling  the  files. 

304.  The  principles  of  this  march  are  the  same  as  in  two  ranks, 
and  it  will  always  be  executed  in  quick  time. 

305.  The  instructor  will  give  the  commands  prescribed  No. 
282,  but  he  will  be  careful  to  caution  the  squad  not  to  double  files. 

306.  The  instructor  will  be  watchful  that  the  men  do  not  bend 
their  knees  unequally,  which  would  cause  them  to  tread  on  the 
heels  of  the  men  in  front,  and  also  to  lose  the  cadence  of  the  step 
aiid  their  distances. 

307.  The  various  movements  in  this  lesson  will  be  executed  in 
single  rank.  In  the  changes  of  direction,  the  leading  man  will 
change  direction  without  altering  the  length  or  the  cadence  of  the 
step.  The  instructor  will  recall  to  the  attention  of  the  men,  that 
in.  facing  by  the  right  or  left  flank  in  marching,  they  will  no 
double,  qut  march  in  one  rank. 


Lesson  IV. 

WHEELINGS. 

General  Principles  of  Wheeling. 

308.  Wheelings  are  of  two  kinds:  from  halts,  or  on  fixed  piv- 
ots, and  in  march,  or  on  moveable  pivots. 

309.  Wheeling  on  a  fixed  pivot  takes  place  in  passing  a  corps 
from  the  order  in  battle  to  the  order  in  column,  or  from  the  latter 
to#the  (ormer. 

310.  Wheels  in  marching  take  place  in  changes  of  direction 
in  column,  as  often  as  this  movement  is  executed  to  the  side  oppo- 
site to  the  guide. 

311.  In  wheels  from  a  halt,  the  pivot  man  only  turns  in  his 
place,  without  advancing  or  receding. 

312.  In  the  wheels  in  marching,  the  pivot  takes  steps  of  nine 
or  eleven  inches,  according  as  the  squad  is  marching  in  quick  or 
double  quick  time,  so  as  to  clear  the  wheeling  point,  which  is 
necessary,  in  order  that  the  subdivisions  of  a  column  may  change 
direction  without  losing  their  distances,  as  will  be  explained  in 
the  school  of  the  company. 

313.  The  man  on  the  wheeling  flank  will  take  the  full  step  ef 
twenty- eight  inches,  or  thirty-three  inches,  according  to  the  gait. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER.  45 

Wheeling  from  a  halt,  or  on  a  fixed  pivot. 

314.  The  rank  being  at  a  halt,  the  instructor  will  place  a  well 
instructed  man  on  the  wheeling  flank  to  conduct  it,  and  then  com- 
mand : 

1.  By  squad,  right  wheel.     2   March. 

315.  At  the  second  command,  the  rank  will  step  off  with  the 
left  foot,  turning  at  the  same  time  the  head  a  little  to  the  left,  the 
eyes  fixed  on  the  line  of  the  eyes  of  the  men  to  their  left ;  the 
pivot-man  will  merely  mark  time  in  gradually  turning  his  body, 
in  order  to  conform  himself  to  the  movement  of  the  marching 
flank;  the  man  who  conducts  this  flank  will  take  steps  of  twenty- 
eight  inches,  and  from  the  first  step  advance  a  little  the  left  shoul. 
der,  cast  his  eyes  from  time  to  time  along  the  rank  and  feel  con- 
stantly the  elbow  of  the  next  man  lightly,  but  never  push  him. 

316.  The  other  men  will  feel  lightly  the  elbow  of  the  next  man 
towards  the  pivot,  resist  pressure  coming  from  the  opposite  side, 
and  each  will  conform  himself  to  the  marching  flank — shortening 
his  step  according  to  his  approximation  to  the  pivot. 

217.  The  instructor  will  make  the  rank  wheel  round  the  circle 
once  or  twice  before  hailing,  in  order  to  cause  (he  principles  to  be 
the  better  understood,  and  ho  will  be  watchful  that  the  centre  does 
not  break. 

313.  He  will  cause  the  wheel  to  the  left  to  be  executed  accord- 
ing to  the  same   principles. 

319.  When  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  arrest  the  wheel,  he- 
will  command  : 

1.  Squad.     2.  Halt. 

320.  At  the  second  command,  the  rank  will  halt,  and  no  man 
stir.  The  instructor,  going  to  the  flank  opposite  the  pivot,  will 
place  the  two  outer  men  of  that  flank  in  the  direction  he  may  wish 
to  give  to  the  rank,  without  however  displacing  the  pivot,  who  will 
conform  the  line  of  his  shoulders  to  this  direction.  The  instructor 
will  take  care  to  have  between  these  two  men,  and  the  pivot,  only 
the  space  necessary  to  contain  the  other  men.  He  will  then  com- 
mand : 

Left  (or  right) — Dress. 

321.  At  this,  the  rank  will  place  itself  on  the  alignment  of  the 
two  men  established  as  the  basis,  in  conformity  with  the  princi- 
ples prescribed. 

322.  The  instructor  will  next  command  Front,  which  will  be 
executed  as  prescribed  No.  245. 

Remarks  on  the  principles  of  the  wheel  from  a  halt. 

323.  Turn  a  little  the  head  towards  the  marching  flank,  and  fix 


46  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 


the  eyes  on  the  line  of  the  eyes  of  the  men  who  are  on  that  side  ; 

Because,  otherwise,  it  would  be  impossible  tor  each  man  to 
regulate  the  length  of  his  step  so  as  to  conform  his  own  movement 
to  that  of  the  marching  flank. 

Touch  lightly  the  elbow  of  the  next  man  towards  Vie  pivot; 

In  order  that  the  tiles  may  not  open  out  in  the  wheel. 

Besist  pressure  that  comes  from  the  side  of  the  marching  flank; 

Because,  if  this  principle  be  neglected,  the  pivot,  which  orght 
to  be  a  fixed  point,  in  wheels  from  a  halt,  Blight  be  pushed  out  of 
its  place  by  pressure. 

Wheeling  in  marching,  or  on  a  moveable  pivot. 

'■V2i.  When  the  recruits  have  been  brought  to  execute  well  the 
wheel  from  a  halt,  they  will  be  taught,  to  wheel  in  marching. 

32$.  To  this  cud,  the  rank  being  in  march,  when  the  instructor 
shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  change  direction  to  the.  reverse  flank,  (to 
die  side  opposite  to  the  guide  or  pivot    flank,)  he  will   command  : 

1.  Right  (or  left)  wheel.    2    Mabch. 

326.  The  first  command  will  be  given  when  the  rank  is  yet 
four  paces  from  the  wheeling  point. 

327.  At  the  second  command,  the  wheel  will  be  executed  in 
the  same  manner  as  from  a  halt,  except  that  the  touch  of  the  el- 
bow will  remain  towards  the  marching  flank  (or  side  of  the  guide) 
instead  of  the  side  of  the  actual  pivot ;  that  the  pivot  man,  instead 
of  meiely  turning  in  his  place,  will  conform  himself  to  the  move- 
ment of  the  marching  flank,  feel  lightly  the  elbow  of  the  next 
man,  take  steps  of  full  nine  inches,  and  thus  gain  ground  forward 
in  describing  a  small  curve  so  as  to  clear  the  point  of  the  wheel. 
The  middle  of  the  rank  will  bend  slightly  to  the  rear.  As  soon 
as  the  movement  shall  commence,  the  man  who  conducts  the 
marching  flank  will  cast  his  eyes  on  the  ground  over  which  he 
will  have  to  pass. 

328.  The  wheel  being  ended  the  instructor  will  command : 

1.  Forward.    2.  March. 

339.  The  first  command  will  be  pronounced  when  four  paces 
are  yet  required  to  complete  the  change  of  direction. 

330.  At  the  command  march,  which  will  be  given  at  the  in- 
stant of  completing  the  wheel,  the  man  who  conducts  the  march- 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER.  47 

ing  flank  will  direct  himself  straight  forward;  the  pivot  man  and 
all  the  tank  will  retake  the  step  of  twenty-eight  inches,  and  bring 
the  head  direct  to  the  front. 

Turning,  or  change  of  direction  to  the  side  of  the  guide. 

331.  The  change  <  f  direction  to  the  side  of  the  guide,  in  march- 
ing, will  be  executed  as  follows  :     The  instructor  will  command  : 

1.  Left  (or  righl)  turn.     2.  Makch. 

332.  1  he  fit  st  command  will  be  given  when  the  rank  is  yet 
four  paces  from  the  turning  point. 

333.  At  ili.  command  march,  to  be  pronounced  at  the  instant 
the  rank  ought  to  turn,  the  guide  will  face  to  the  left  (or  right)  in 
marching,  ami  mote  forward  in  the  new  direction  without  short- 
euing  or  quickening  the  cadence,  and  without  shortening  or 
lengthening  the  step.  The  whole  rank  will  promptly  conform 
itself  to  the  new  direction  ;  to  effect  which,  each  man  will  ad- 
vance  the  shoulder  opposite  to  the  guide,  take  the  double  quick 
step,  to  carry  himself  iu  the  new  direction,  turn  the  head  and 
eyes  to  the  side  of  the  guide,  and  retake  the  touch  of  the  elbow- 
on  thai  side,  in  placing  himself  on  the  alignment  oi  the  guide, 
from  wli.iui  he  will  take  the  step,  and  then  resume  the  direct  po- 
sition of  the  head,  rlach  man  will  thus  arrive  successively  on 
the  alignment. 

Wiieeling  and  changing  direction  to  the  side  of  the  guide,  in  double  quick 

time. 

334.  When  i he  recruits  comprehend  and  execute  well,  in  quick 
time,  tie  wheels  at  a  halt  and  in  marching,  and  the  change  of 
direction  to  the  side  ol  the  guide,  the  instructor  will  cause  the 
same  movements  (d  be  repeated  in  double  quick  time. 

335.  I  iiese  various  movements  will  be  executed  by  the  same 
commands  and  accoiding  to  the  >ame  principles  as  in  quick  time, 
except  that,  the  command  double  quick  will  precede  that  of  march. 
In  wheeling  whi.e  man  king,  the  pivot  man  will  take  steps  of 
eleven  inches,  a<nd  in  ttte  rhanges  oi  direction  to  the  side  oi  the 
guide,  the  men  0:1  the  sidtf  Opposite  the  guide  must  increase  the 
gait  in  order  to  bring  themselves  iu  line. 

33ti.  I  lie  instructur,  in  order  not  to  fatigue  the  recruits,  and 
not  to  divide  their  attention  will  cause  them  to  execute  the  seve- 
ral movements  of'  which  this  lesson  is  composed,  first  without 
arms,  and  next,  after  the  mechanism  be  well  comprehended,  with 
arms. 

Lesson  V. 
Long  marches  in  double  quick  time  and  the  run. 

337.  The  instiuctor  will  cause  to  be  resumed  the  exercises  in 
doab'e  quick  time  and  the  run,  with  arms  and  knapsacks. 


48  SI  ilOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 

338.  He  will  cause  long  matches  to  be  executed  in  double  quick 
time,  both  by  the  front  and  by  the  flank,  and  by  constant  practice 
will  lead  the  men  to  pass  over  a  distance  of  five  miles  in  sixty 
minutes.  The  pieces  will  be  carried  on  either  shoulder,  and 
sometimes  at  a  trail. 

339.  He  will  also  exercise  them  in  long  marches  at  a  run,  the 
pieces  carried  at  will;  the  men  will  be  instructed  to  keep  as  united 
as  possible,  without  however  exacting  much  regularity,  which  is 
impracticable. 

340.  The  run,  in  actual  service,  will  only  be  resorted  to  when 
it  may  be  highly  important  to  reach  :i  given  point  with  great 
promntiti. 

To  stack  arins. 

The  men  being  at  order  arms,  the.  instructor  will  command  : 

Slack — Amis, 

341.  At  this  command,  the  front  rank  man  of  every  even  num- 
bered file  will  pass  his  piece  before  him,  seizing  it  with  the  left 
hand  near  the  upper  band;  will  place  the  butt  a  little  in  advance 
of  his  left  toe,  the  barrel  turned  towards  the  body,  and  draw  the 
rammer  slightly  from  its  place;  the  front  rank  man  of  every  odd 
numbered  file  will  also  draw  the  rammer  slightly,  and  pass  his 
piece  to  the  man  next  on  his  left,  who  will  seize  it  with  the  right 
hand  near  the  upper  band,  and  place  the  butt  a  little  in  advance 
of  the  right  toe  of  the  man  next  on  his  right,  the  barrel  turned  to 
the  front;  he  will  then  cross  the  rammers  of  the  two  pieces,  the 
rammer  of  the  piece  of  the  odd  numbered  man  being  inside  ;  the 
rear  rank  man  of  every  even  file  will  also  draw  his  rammer,  lean 
his  piece  forward,  the  lock- plate  downwards,  advance  the  right 
foot  abqut  six  inches,  and  insert  the  rammer  between  the  rammer 
and  barrel  of  the  piece  of  his  front  rank  man  ;  with  his  left  hand 
he  wdl  place  the  butt  of  his  piece  on  the  ground,  thirty-two  inches 
in  rear  of,  and  perpendicular  to,  the  front  rank,  bringing  back  his 
right  foot  by  the  side  of  the  left ;  the  front  rank  man  of  every  even 
file  will  at  the  same  time  lean  the  stack  to  the  rear,  quit  it  with 
his  right  hand  and  force  the  rammers  down.  The  stack  being 
thus  formed,  the  rear  rank  men  of  every  odd  file  will  pass  his  piece 
into  his  left  hand,  the  barrel  to  the  front  and  inclining  it  forward, 
will  rest  it  on  the  stack. 

342.  The  men  of  both  ranks  having  taken  the  position  of  the 
soldier  without  arms,  the  instructor  will  command  : 

1.  JBrenk  ranks.     2.  March. 
To  resume  arms. 

343.  Both  ranks  being  re-formed  in  rear  of  their  stacks,  the- 
instructor  will  command : 

Take — Arms. 


SCHOOL  OP  THE  SOLDIER.  49 

344.  At  this  command,  the  rear  rank  man  of  every  odd  num. 
bored  file  will  withdraw  his  piece  from  the  stack ;  the  front  rank 
man  of  every  even  file  will  seize  his  own  piece  with  the  left  hand 
and  that  of  the  man  on  his  right  with  his  right  hand,  both  above 
the  lower  band  ;  the  rear  rank  man  of  the  even  file  will  seize  his 
piece  with  the  right  hand  below  the  lower  band  ;  these  two  men 
will  raise  up  the  stack  to  loosen  the  rammers;  the  front  rank  man 
of  every  odd  file  will  facilitate  the  disengagement  of  the  rammers, 
if  necessary,  by  drawing  them  out  slightly  with  the  left  hand,  and 
will  receive  his  piece  from  the  hand  of  the  man  next  on  his  left; 
the  four  men  will  retake  the  position  of  the  soldier  at  order  arms. 


END    OF   THE    SCHOOL    OF    THE    SOLDIER. 


TITLE      THIRD. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY. 

General  Rules  and  division  of  the  School  of  the  Company. 

1.  Instruction  by  company  will  always  precede  that  by  battalion^ 
and  the  object  being  to  prepare  the  soldiers  for  the  higher  school, 
the  exercises  of  detail  by  company  will  be  strictly  adhered  to,  as 
well  in  respect  to  principles,  as  the  order  of  progression  herein 
prescribed. 

2.  There  will  be  attached  to  a  company  undergoing  elementary 
instruction,  a  captain,  a  covering  sergeant,  and  a  certain  number 
of  file  closers,  the  whole  posted  in  the  manner  indicated,  Tille 
First,  and,  according  to  the  same  title,  the  officer  charged  with 
the  exercise  of  such  company  will  herein  be  denominated  the 
instructor. 

3.  The  School  of  the  Company  will  be  divided  into  six  lesson?, 
and  each  lesson  will  comprehend  five  articles,  as  follows — 

Lesson  I. 

1.  To  open  ranks. 

2.  Alignments  in  open  ranks. 

3.  Manual  of  arms. 

4.  To  close  ranks. 

5.  Alignments,  and  manual  of  arms  in  closed  ranks. 

Lesson  II. 

1.  To  toad  in  four  times  and  at  will. 

2.  To  fire  by  company. 

3.  To  fire  by  file. 

4.  To  fire  by  rank. 

5.  To  fire  by  the  rear  rank. 

Lesson*  III. 

1.  To  march  in  line  of  battle. 

2.  To  halt  the  company  marching  in  line  of  battle,  and  to  align 
it. 

3.  Oblique  march  in  line  of  battle. 

4.  To  mark  time,  to  march  in  double  quick  time,  and  the  back 
step. 

5.  To  march  in  retreat  in  line  of  battle. 


52  SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY. 

Lesson  IV. 

1.  To  march  by  the  flank. 

2.  To  change  direction  by  file. 

3.  To  halt  the  company  marching  by  the  flank,  and  to  face  it 
to  the  front. 

4.  The  company  being  in  march  by  the  flank,  to  form  it  or,  the. 
right  or  left  by  file  into  line  of  battle. 

5.  The  company  marching  by  the  flank,  to  form  it  by  company 
or  platoon  into  line,  and  cause  it  to  face  to  the  right  and  left  in 
marching. 

Lesson  V. 

1.  To  break  into  column  by  platoon  either  at  a  halt,  or  while 
marching. 

2.  To  march  in  column. 

3.  To  change  direction. 

4.  To  halt  the  column.- 

5.  Being  in  column  by  platoon,  to  form  to  the  right  or  left  into 
line  of  battle,  either  at  a  halt  or  marching. 

Lesson   VI. 

1.  To  break  into  platoons,  and  to  re-form  the  company. 

2.  To  break  files  to  the  rear,  and  to  cause  them  to  re-enter  into 
line. 

3.  To  march  in  column  in  route,  and  to  execute  the  movements 
incident  thereto. 

4.  Countermarch. 

5.  Being  in  column  by  platoon,  to  iorm  on  the  right  or  left  into 
line  of  battle. 

4.  The  company  will  always  be  formed  in  two  ranks.  The 
instructor  will  then  cause  the  files  to  be  numbered,  and  lor  this 
purpose  will  command — 

In  each  ran\ — Coun'  Twos. 

5.  At  this  command,  the  men  count  in  each  rank,  from  right  to 
left,  pronouncing  in  a  loud  and  distinct  voice,  in  the  same  tone, 
without  hurry  and  without  turning  the  head,  one,  tito,  according  to 
the  place  which  each  one  occupies.  He  will  also  cause  the  com- 
pany to  be  divided  into  platoons  and  sections,  taking  care  that  the 
lirst  platoon  is  always  composed  of  an  even  number  of  files. 

6.  The  instructor  will  be  as  clear  and  concise  as  possible  in  his 
explanations  ;  he  will  cause  faults  of  detail  to  be  rectified  by  the 
captain,  to  whom  he  will  indicate  them,  if  the  captain  should  not 
have  himself  observed  them  ;  and  the  instructor  will  not  otherwise 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY.  53 

interfere,  unless  the  captain  should  not  well  comprehend,  or  should 
badly  execute  his  intentions. 

7.  Composure,  or  presence  of  mind,  in  him  who  commands, 
and  in  those  who  obey,  being  the  first  means  of  Grder  in  a  body 
of  troops,  the  instructor  will  labor  to  habituate  the  company  to 
this  essential  quality,  and  will  himselfgive  the  example. 

LESSON   FIRST. 
Article  First. 

To  open  ranks. 

8.  The  company  being  at  ordered  arms,  the  ranks  and  file 
closers  well  aligned,  when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  cause  the 
ranks  to  be  opened,  he  will  direct  the  left  guide  to  place  himself 
on  the  left,  of  the  front  rank,  which  being  executed,  he  will  com- 
mand— 

1.  Attention      2.  Company.       3.  Shoulder — Arms.     4.   To  the 
rear  open  order. 

9.  At  the  fourth  command,  the  covering  sergeant,  and  the  left 
guide,  will  step  of  smartly  to  the  rear,  four  paces  from  the  front 
rank,  in  order  to  mark  the  alignment  of  the  rear  rank.  They 
will  judge  this  distance  by  the  eye,  without   counting  the   steps. 

10.  The  instructor  will  place  himself  at  the  same  time  on  the 
right  flank,  in  order  to  observe,  if  these  two  non-commissioned 
officers  are  on  a  line  parallel  to  the  front  rank,  and  if  necessary, 
to  correct  their  positions,  which  being  executed,  ho  will  command: 

5.  March. 

11.  At  this  command,  the  front  rank  will  stand  fast. 

12.  The  rear  rank  will  step  to  the  rear,  without  counting  the 
steps,  and  will  place  themselves  on  the  alignment  marked  for  this 
rank,  conforming  to  what  is  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier, 
No.  252. 

13.  The  covering  sergeant  will  align  the  rear  rank  on  the  left 
guide  placed  to  mark  the  left  of  this  rank. 

14.  The  file  closers  will  march  to  the  rear  at  the  same  time 
with  the  rear  rank,  and  will  place  themselves  two  paces  from  this 
rank  when  it  is  aligned.       0 

15.  The  instructor  seeing  the  rear  rank  aligned,  will  com- 
mand : 

6.  Front. 

16.  At  this  command,  the  sergeant  on  the  left  of  the  rear  rank 
wid  turn  to  his  place  as  a  file  closer. 

17.  The  rear  rank  being  aligned,  the  instructor  will  direct  the 


54  SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY 

captain  and  the  covering  sergeant  to  observe  the  men  in  their 
respective  ranks,  and  to  correct  if  necessary,  the  positions  of  per- 
sons and  pieqes. 

Article  Second. 

Alignments   in   open  ranks. 

18.  The  ranks  being  open,  the  instructor  will,  in  the  first  exer~ 
cises,  align  J.he  ranks,  man  by  man,  the  better  to  inculcate  the 
principles. 

19.  To  effect  this,  he  will  cause  two  or  four  men  on  the  right 
j>r  left  of  each  rank  to  march  two  or  three  paces  forward,  and, 
after  having  aligned  them,  command  : 

.  By  fie  right  (or  left) — Dress. 

20.  At  this,  the  men  of  each  rank  will  move  up  successively 
on  the  alignment  each  man  being  preceded  by  his  neighbor  in 
4he  same  rank,  towards  the  basis,  by  two  paces,  and  having  cor- 
rectly aligned  himself,  will  cast  his  eyes  to  the  front. 

21.  Successive  alignments  having  habituated  the  soldiers  to 
dress  correctly,  the  instructor  will  cause  the  ranks  to  align  them-, 
selves  at  once,  forward  and  backward,  sometimes  in  a  direction 
parallel,  and  sometimes  in  one  oblique,  to  the  original  direction, 
giving,  in  each  case,  two  or  four  men  to  serve  as  a  basis  of  align- 
ment to  each  rank.     To  effect  which,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Right  (or  left) — Dress.     2.  Front. 

or 

1.  Right  (or  left)  backward — Dress.     2.  Front. 

22.  In  oblique  alignments,  in  opened  ranks,  the  men  of  the 
jear  rank  will  not  seek  to  cover  their  file  leaders,  as  the  sole  ob- 
ject of  the  exercise  is  to  teach  them  to  align  themselves  correctly 
in  their  respective  ranks,  in  the  different  directions. 

23.  In  the  several  alignments,  the  captain  will  superintend  the 
front  rank,  and  the  covering  sergeant  the  rear  rank.  For  this 
purpose,  they  will  place  themselves  on  the  side  by  which  the 
ranks  are  dressed. 

24.  In  oblique  alignments,  the  men  will  conform  the  line  of 
iheir  shoulders  to  the  new  direction  of  their  rank,  and  will  place 
flhemselves  on  the  alignments  as  has  been  prescribed  in  the  school 
of  the  soldier,  No.  248  or  No.  252,  according  as  the  new  direc- 
tion shall  be  in  front  or  rear  of  the  original  one. 

25.  At  the  end  of  each  alignment,  the  captain  and  the  cover- 
ing sergeant  will  pass  along  the  front  of  the  ranks  to  correct  the 
position  of  persons  and  arms. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY.  55 

Article  Third. 
Manual  of  arms. 

26.  The  ranks  being  open,  the  instructor  will  place  himself  in 
a  position  to  see  the  ranks,  and  will  command  the  manual  of  arms 
in  the  following  order  : 

Present  arms.  Shoulder  arr 
Order  arms. 
Ground  arms. 

Raise  arms.  Shoulder  arms. 

Support  arms.  Shoulder  arms. 

Fix  bayonet.  Shoulder  arms. 

Charge  bayonet.  Shoulder  arms. 

Trail  arms.  Shoidder  arms. 

Unfix  bayonet.  Shoulder  arms. 

Secure  arms.  Shoidder  arms. 
Load  in  nine  times. 

27.  The  instructor  will  take  care  that  the  position  of  thefbody, 
of  the  feet,  and  of  the  piece,  be  always  exact,  and  that  the'ktimes 
be  briskly  executed  and  close  to  the  person. 

Article  Fourth. 
To  close  ranks. 

28.  The  manual  of  arms  being  ended,  the  instructor  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  Close  order.     2.  March. 

29.  At  the  command  march,  the  rear  rank  will  close  up  in 
quick  time,  each  man  directing  himself  on  his  file  leader. 

Article  Fifth. 
Alignments,  and  ?nanual  of  arms  in  closed  ranks. 

30.  The  ranks  being  closed,  the  instructor  will  cause  to  be 
executed  parallel  and  oblique  alignments  by  the  right  and  left, 
forward  and  backward,  observing  to  place  always  two  or  four  files 
to  serve  as  a  basis  of  alignment.  He  will  give  the  commands 
prescribed,  No.  21. 

31.  In  alignments  in  closed  ranks,  the  captain  will  superintend 
the  front  rank,  and  the  covering  sergeant  the  rear  rank.  They 
will  habituate  themselves  to  judge  the  alignment  by  the  lines  of 
the  eyes  and  shoulders,  in  casting  a  glance  of  the  eye  along  the 
front  and  rear  of  the  ranks. 


56  SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY. 

32.  The  moment  the  captain  perceives  the  greater  number  of 
the  front  rank  aligned,  he  will  command — Front,  and  rectify,  af- 
terwards,  if  necessary,  the  alignment  of  the  other  men  by  the 
means  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  No.  251.  The  rear 
rank  will  conform  to  the  alignment  of  the  front  rank,  superinten. 
ded  by  the  covering  sergeant. 

33.  The  ranks  being  steady,  the  instructor  will  place  himself 
on  the  flank  to  verify  the  alignment.  He  will  also  see  that  each 
rear  rank  man  covers  accurately  his  file  leader. 

34.  In  oblique  alignments,  the  instructor  will  observe  what  is 
prescribed,  No.  24. 

35.  In  all  alignments,  the  file  closers  will  preserve  the  distance 
of  two  paces  from  the  rear  rank. 

36.  The  alignments  being  ended,  the  instructor  will  cause  to 
be  executed  the  manual  of  arms. 

37.  The  instructor,  wishing  to  rest  the  men,  without  deranging 
the  alignment,  will  first  cause  arms  to  be  supported,  or  ordered, 
and  then  command : 

In  place — Rest. 

38.  At  this  command,  the  men  will  no  longer  be  constrained 
to  preserve  silence  or  steadiness  of  position  ;  but  they  will  always 
keep  one  or  other  heel  on  the  alignment. 

39.  If  on  the  contrary,  the  instructor  should  wish  to  rest  the 
men  without  constraining  them  to  preserve  the  alignment,  he  will 
command  : 

Rest. 

40.  At  which  command,  the  men  will  not  be  required  to  pre- 
serve immobility,  or  to  remain  in  their  places. 

41.  The  instructor  may,  also,  when  he  shall  judge  proper, 
cause  arms  to  be  stacked,  which  will  be  executed  as  prescribed, 
school  of  the  soldier- 

LESSON  SECOND. 

42.  The  instructor  wishing  to  pass  to  the  second  lesson,  will 
cause  the  company  to  take  arms,  if  stacks  have  been  formed,  and 
command — 

1.  Attention.     2.   Company.     3.    Shoulder — Arms. 

43.  The  instructor  will  then  cause  loadings  and  firings  to  be 
executed  in  the  following  order : 

Article  First. 

To  load  in   four    times  and   at  will. 

44.  Loading  in  four  times  will  be  commanded  and  executed  as 
prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  No.  132,  and  following. 


SCHOOL  OP  THE  COMPANY.  57 

The  instructor  will  cause  this  exercise  to  be  often   repeated,   in 
succession,  before  passing  to  load  at  will. 

45.  Loading  at  will,  will  be  commanded  and  executed  as  pre- 
scribed in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  No.  187.  In  piiming  when 
loading  in  four  times,  and  also  at  will,  the  captain  and  covering 
sergeant  will  half  face  to  the  right  with  the  men,  and  face  to  the 
front  when  the  man  next  to  them,  respectively,  brings  his  pioce  to 
the  shoulder. 

46.  The  instructor  will  labor  to  the  utmost  to  cause  the  men, 
in  the  different  loadings,  to  execute  what  has  been  prescribed  in 
the  school  of  the  soldier,  Nos.  188  and  189. 

47.  Loading  at  will,  being  that  of  battle,  and  consequently  the 
one  with  which  it  is  most  important  to  render  the  men  familiar, 
it  will  claim  preference  in  the  exercises  the  moment  the  men  be 
well  established  in  the  principles.  To  these  they  will  be  brought 
by  degrees,  so  that  every  man  may  be  able  to  load  with  cartridges 
and  to  fire  at  least  three  rounds  in  a  minute  with  ease  and  regu- 
larity. 

Article  Second. 

To   fire    by    company. 

48.  The  instructor,  wishing  to  cause  the  fire  by  company  to  be 
executed,  will  command: 

1.  Fire   by  company.      2.  Commence  firing. 

49.  At  the  first  command,  the  captain  will  promptly  place  him- 
self opposite  the  centre  of  his  company,  and  four  paces  in  rear  of 
the  line  of  file  closers  ;  the  covering  sergeant  will  retire  to  that 
line,  and  place  himself  opposite  to  his  interval.  This  rule  is  gen. 
eral,  for  both  the  captain  and  covering  sergeant,  in  all  the  differ, 
ent  firings. 

50.  At  the  second  command,  the  captain  will  add:  1.  Com- 
pany ;  2.  Ready;  3.  Aim  ;  4.  Fire;  5.  Load. 

51.  At  the  command  load,  the  men  will  load  their  pieces,  and 
then  take  the  position  of  ready,  as  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the 
soldier. 

52.  The  captain  will  immediately  recommence  the  firing,  by 
the  commands  ; 

1.  Company.     2.  Aim.  3.  Fire.     4.  Load. 

53.  The  firing  will  be  thus  continued  until  the  signal  to  cease 
firing  is  sounded. 

54.  The  captain  will  sometimes  cause  aim  to  be  taken  to  the 
right  and  left,  simply  observing  to  pronounce  right  (or  left) 
oblique,  before  the  command  aim. 


58  S<  IIOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY 


Article  Third. 
The  fir  e    by    file. 

55.  The  instructor  wishing  to  cau^e  the  fire  by  file  to  be  exe- 
cuted, will  command  : 

i.    Fire  by  file.     2.  Company.     3.  Ready.     4.  Commence  firing. 

56.  The  third  and  fourth  commands  will  be  executed  as  pre- 
scribed in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  No.  206  and  following. 

57.  The  fire  will  be  commenced  by  the  right  file  of  the  com- 
pany;  the  next  file  will  take  aim  at  the  instant  the  first  brings 
down  pieces  to  re-load,  and  so  on  to  the  left ;  but  this  progression 
will  only  be  observed  in  the  first  discharge,  after  which  each  man 
will  reload  and  fire  without  regnlating  himself  by  others,  con- 
forming himself  to  what  is  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier, 
No.  211, 

Article  Fourth. 

T  o  fi  r  e  -b  y     rank. 

58.  The  instructor  wishing  the  fire  by  rank  to  he  executed,  will 
command : 

1.  Fire    by  rank.     2.   Company.     3.  Ready.      1.    Rear  rank 
Aim.     5.  Fire.     6.  Load. 

59.  The  fifth  and  sixth  commands  will  be  executed  as  is  pre- 
scribed in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  No.  216,  and  following. 

60.  When  the  instructor  sees  one  or  two  pieces  in  the  rear 
rank  at  a  ready,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Front  rank.     2.  Aim.     3.  Fire.     4.  Load. 

61.  The  firing  will  be  continued  thus  by  alternate  ranks,  until 
the  signal  is  given  to  cease  firing. 

62.  The  instructor  will  sometimes  cause  aim  to  be  taken  to  the 
right  and  left,  conforming  to  what  is  prescribed  No.  54. 

63.  The  instructor  will  cause  the  firing  to  cease,  whether  by 
company,  by  file,  or  by  rank,  by  sounding  the  signal  to  cease  firing, 
and  at  the  instant  this  sound  commences,  the  men  will  cease  to 
fire,  conforming  to  what  is  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier, 
No.  213. 

64.  The  signal  to  cease  firing  will  be  always  followed  by  a 
bugle  note;  at  which  sound,  the  captain  and  covering  sergeant 
will  promptly  resume  their  places  in  line,  and  will  rectify,  if  ne- 
cessary, the  alignment  of  the  ranks. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY  59 

65.  In  this  school,  except  when  powder  is  used,  the  signal  to 
cease  firing  will  be  indicated  by  the  command  cease  firing,  which 
will  be  pronounced  by  the  instructor  when  he  wishes  the  sem- 
blance of  firing  to  cease. 

66.  The  command  posts  will  be  likewise  substituted,  under  sim- 
ilar circumstances,  for  the  bugle  note  employed  as  the  signal  for 
the  return  of  the  captain  and  covering  sergeant  to  their  places  in 
line,  which  command  will  be  given  when  the  instructor  sees  the 
men  have  brought  their  pieces  to  a  shoulder. 

67.  The  fire  by  file  being  that  which  is  most  frequently  used 
against  an  enemy,  it  is  highly  important  that  it  be  rendered  per- 
fectly familiar  to  the  troops.  The  instructor  will,  therefore,  give 
it  almost  exclusive  preference,  and  labor  to  cause  the  men  to  aim 
with  care,  and  always,  if  possible,  at  some  particular  object.  As 
it  is  of  the  utmost  importance  that  the  men  should  aim  with  pre- 
cision in  battle,  this  principle  will  be  rigidly  enforced  in  the  ex- 
ercises for  purposes  of  instruction. 

Akticlk  Fifth. 
To  fire  by  the  rear  rank. 

68.  The  instructor  will  cause  the  several  fires  to  be  executed 
to  the  rear,  that  is,  by  the  rear  rank.  To  effect  this,  he  will 
command — 

1.    Face  by   the   rear  rank.     2.  Company.      3.  About — Face. 

69.  \t  the  first  command,  the  captain  will  step  out  and  place 
himself  near  to,  and  facing  the  right  file  of  his  company;  the  cov- 
ering sergeant,  and  file  closers,  will  pass  quickly  through  the 
captain's  interval,  and  place  himself  faced  to  the  rear,  the  cover- 
ing  sergeant  a  pace  behind  the  captain,  and  the  file  closers  two 
paces  from  the  front  rank,  opposite  to  their  places  in  line,  each 
passing  behind  the  covering  sergeant. 

70.  At  the  third  command,  which  will  be  given  at  the  instant 
the  last  file  closer  shall  have  passed  through  the  interval,  the  com- 
pany will  face  about ;  the  captain  will  place  himself  in  his  inter- 
val in  the  rear  rank,  now  become  the  front,  and  the  covering  ser- 
geant will  cover  him  in  the  front  rank,  now  become  the  rear. 

71.  The  company  having  faced  by  the  rear  rank,  the  instructor 
will  cause  it  to  execute  the  fire  by  company,  both  direct  and  ob. 
lique,  the  fire  by  file,  and  the  fire  by  rank,  by  the  commands  and 
means  prescribed  in  the  three  preceeding  articles  ;  the  captain, 
covering  sergeant,  and  the  men  will  conform  themselves,  in  like 
manner,  to  what  is  therein  prescribed. 

72.  The  fire  by  file,  will  commence  on  the  left  of  the  company, 
now  become  the  right.  In  the  fire  by  rank,  the  firing  will  com- 
mence with  the  front  rank,  now  become  the  rear. 


60  SCHOOL  OP  THE  COMPANY. 

73.  To  resume   the  proper  front,  the  instructor  will  command  : 
1.   Face  by  the  front  rank.     2.   Company.     3.   About — Face. 

74.  At  the  first  command,  the  captain,  covering  sergeant  and 
file  closers,  will  conform  to  what  is  prescribed  Nos.  69  and  70. 

75.  At  the  third  command,  the  company  having  faced  about,  the 
captain  and  covering  sergeant  will  resume  their  places  in  line. 

76.  In  this  lesson,  the  instructor  will  impress  on  the  men  the 
importance  of  aiming  always  at  some  particular  object,  and  hold- 
ing the  piece  as  prescribed   it.  the  school  of  the  soldier,  No.  109. 

77.  The  instructor  will  recommend  to  the  captain  to  make  a 
short  pause  between  the  command  aim  and  /ire,  to  give  the  men 
time  to  aim  with  accuracy. 

78.  The  instructor  will  place  himself  in  position  to  see  the  two 
ranks,  in  order  to  detect  faults  ;  he  will  charge  the  captain  and 
file  closers  to  be  equally  watchful,  and  to  report  to  him  when  the 
ranks  are  at  rest.  He  will  remand,  for  individual  instruction,  the 
men  who  may  be  observed  to  load  badly. 

79.  The  instructor  will  recommend  to  the  soldiers,  in  the  firings, 
the  highest  degree  of  composure  or  presence  of  mind  ;  he  will 
neglect  nothing  that  may  contribute  to  this  end. 

80.  He  will  give  to  the  men,  as  a  general  principle,  to  main- 
tain, in  the  direct  fire,  the  lelt  heel  in  its  place,  in  order  that  the 
alignment  of  the  ranks  and  files  may  not  be  deranged  ;  and  he 
will  verify,  by  examination,  after  each  exercise  in  firing,  the  ob- 
servance  of  this  principle. 

81.  The  instructor  will  observe,  in  addition  to  these  remarks, 
all  those  which  follow. 

82.  When  the  firing  is  executed  with  cartridges,  it  is  particu- 
Jarly  recommended  that  the  men  observe,  in  uncocking,  whether 
smoke  escapes  from  the  tube,  which  is  a  certain  indication  thar* 
the  piece  has  been  discharged  ;  but  if,  on  the  contrary,  no  smoke 
escapes,  the  soldier,  in  such  case,  instead  of  re-loading,  will  pick 
and  prime  again.  If,  believing  the  load  to  be  discharged,  the 
soldier  should  put  a  second  cartridge  in  his  piece,  he  ought,  at 
least,  to  perceive  it  in  ramming,  by  the  height  of  the  load  ;  and 
he  would  be  very  culpable,  should  he  put  in  a  third.  The  instruc- 
tor will  always  cause  arms  to  be  inspected  after  firing  wi  h  car- 
tridges, in  order  to  observe  if  the  fault  has  been  committed,  of 
putting  three  cartridges,  wiihout  a  discharge,  in  the  same  piece, 
in  which  case  the  ball  screw  will  be  applied. 

83.  It  sometimes  happens,  when  a  cap  has  missed  fire,  that  the 
tube  is  found  stopped  up  with  a  hard,  white,  and  compact  powder; 
in  this  case,  picking  will  be  dispensed  with,  and  a  new  cap  sub- 
stituted for  the  old  one. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY.  61 

LESSON  THIRD. 

Article  First. 

To  advance  in  a  line  of  battle. 

84.  The  company  being  in  a  line  of  battle,  and  correctly  aligned, 
when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  exercise  it  in  marching  by  the 
front,  he  will  assure  himself  that  the  shoulders  of  the  captain  and 
covering  6ergeant  are  perfectly  in  the  direction  of  their  respective 
ranks,  and  that  the  sergeant  accurately  covers  the  captain  ;  the 
instructor  will  then  place  himself  twenty -five  or  thirty  paces  in 
front  of  them,  face  to  the  rear,  and  place  himself  exactly  on  the 
prolongation  of  the  line  passing  between  their  heels. 

85.  The  instructor,  being  aligned  on  the  directing  file,  will 
command  : 

1.   Company  forward. 

86.  At  this,  a  sergeant,  previously  designated,  will  move  six 
paces  in  advance  of  the  captain  ;  the  instructor,  from  the  position 
prescribed,  will  correctly  align  this  sergeant  on  the  prolongation 
of  the  directing  file. 

87.  This  advance  sergeant,  whe  is  to  be  charged  with  the 
direction,  will,  the  moment  his  position  is  assured,  take  two  points 
on  the  ground,  in  the  straight  line  which  would  pass  between  his 
own,  and  the  heels  of  the  instructor. 

88.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  instructor  will  step 
aside,  and  command  : 

2.   March. 

89.  At  this,  the  company  will  step  off  with  life.  The  directing 
sergeant  will  observe,  with  the  greatest  precision,  the  length  and 
cadence  of  the  step,  marching  on  the  two  points  he  has  chosen  ; 
he  will  take  in  succession,  and  always  a  little  before  arriving  at 
the  point  nearest  to  him,  new  points  in  advance,  exactly  in  the 
same  line  with  the  first  two,  and  at  the  distance  of  some  fifteen 
or  twenty  paces  from  each  other.  The  captain  will  march  stead- 
ily in  the  trace  of  the  directing1  sergeant,  keeping  always  six 
paces  from  him;  the  men  will  each  maintian  the  head  direct  to 
the  front,  feel  lightly  the  elbow  of  his  neighbor  on  the  side  of  di- 
rection, and  conform  himself  to  the  principles  prescribed,  school 
of  the  soldier,  for  the  march  by  the  front. 

90.  The  man  next  to  the  captain,  will  take  special  care  not  to 
pass  him  ;  to  this  end,  he  will  keep  the  line  of  his  shoulders  a 
little  in  the  rear,  but  in  the  same  direction  with  those  of  the  cap- 
tain. 


62  S<  300L  OF  THE  company. 

91.  The  file  closers  will  march  at  the  habitual  distance  of  two 
paces  behind  the  rear  rank. 

92.  If  the  men  lose  the  step,  the  instructor  will  command  : 

To  the — Stev. 

93.  At  this  command,  the  men  will  glance  towards  the  direct- 
ing sergeant,  retake  the^  step  from  him,  and  again  direct  their 
eyes  to  the  front. 

94.  The  instructor  will  cause  the  captain  and  covering  sergeant 
to  be  posted  sometimes  on  the  right,  and  sometimes  on  the  left  of 
the  company. 

95.  The  directing  sergeant,  in  advance,  having  the  greatest  in- 
fluence on  the  march  of  the  company,  he  will  be  selected  for  the 
precision  of  his  step,  his  habit  of  maintaining  his  shoulders  in  a 
square  or  a  given  line  of  direction,  and  of  prolonging  that  line 
without  variation. 

96.  If  this  sergeant  should  lail  to  observe  these  principles,  un. 
dulations  in  the  front  of  the  company  must  necessarily  follow  ; 
the  men  will  be  unable  to  contract  the  habit  of  taking  steps  equal 
in  length  and  swiftness,  and  of  maintaining  their  shoulders  in  a 
square  with  the  line  of  direction — the  only  means  of  attaining 
perfection  in  the  march  in  line. 

97.  The  insiructor,  with  a  view  the  better  to  establish  the  men 
in  the  length  and  cadence  of  the  step,  and  in  the  principles  of  the 
march  in  line,  will  cause  the  company  to  advance  three  or  four 
hundred  paces,  at  once,  without  hailing,  if  the  ground  will  permit. 
In  the  first  exercises,  he  will  march  the  company  with  open  ranks, 
the  better  to  observe  the  two  ranks. 

98.  The  instructor  will  see,  with  care,  that  all  the  principles 
of  the  march  in  line  are  strictly  observed  ;  he  will  generally  be 
on  the  directing  flank,  in  a  position  to  observe  the  two  ranks,  and 
the  faults  they  may  commit ;  he  will  sometimes  halt  behind  the 
directing  file  during  some  thirty  successive  steps,  in  order  to  judge 
whether  the  directing  sergeant,  or  the  directing  file,  deviate  from 
the  perpendicular. 

Article  Second. 

1o  halt  the  company,  marching  in  line  of  battle,  and  to  align  it, 

99.  The  instructor,  wishing  to  halt  the  company,  willcommmand  : 

1.  Company.  2.  Halt. 

100.  At  the  second  command,  the  company  will  halt ;  the  di- 
recting sergeant  will  remain  in  advance,  unless  ordered  to  return 
to  the  line  of  file  closers.  The  company  being  at  a  halt,  the  in- 
structor may  advance  the  first  three  or  four  files  on  the  side  of  di- 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY.  63 

rection,  and  align  the  company  on  that  basis,  or  he  may  confine 
himself  to  causing  the  alignment  to  be  rectified.  In  this  last 
case,  he  will  command :  Captain,  rectify  the  alignment.  The 
captain  will  direct  the  covering  sergeant  to  attend  to  the  rear 
rank,  when  each,  glancing  his  eyes  along  his  rank,  will  promptly 
rectify  it,  conforming  to  what  is  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the 
soldier,  No.  251. 

Article  Third. 
Oliqne  march  in  the  line  of  battle. 

101.  The  company  being  in  the  direct  march,  when  the  in- 
structor  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  march  obliquely  he  will  com. 
mand  : 

1.  Right  (or  left)  oblique,  2.  March. 

102.  At  the  coramam'  march,  the  company  will  take  the  oblique 
step.  The  men  will  accurately  observe  the  principles  prescribed 
in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  No.  202.  The  rear  rank  men  will 
observe  their  distances,  and  march  in  rear  of  the  man  next  on 
the  right  (or  left)  of  their  habitual  file  leaders. 

103.  When  the  instructor  wishes  the  direct  march  to  be  re- 
sumed,  he  will  command : 

1.  Forward.     2.   March* 

104.  At  the  command  mach,  the  company  will  resume  the 
direct  march.  The  instructor  will  move  briskly  twenty  paces  in 
front  of  the  captain,  and  facing  the  company,  will  place  himself 
exactly  in  the  prolongation  of  the  captain  and  covering  sergeant  ; 
and  then  by  a  sign,  will  move  the  directing  sergeant  on  the  same 
line,  if  he  be  not  already  on  it :  the  latter  will  immediately  take 
two  points  on  the  ground  between  himself  and  the  instructor,  and 
as  he  advances,  will  take  new  points  of  direction,  as  is  explained 
No.  89. 

105.  In  the  oblique  march,  the  men  not  having  the  touch  of  el- 
bows,  the  guide  will  always  be  on  the  side  towards  which  the  ob* 
lique  is  made,  without  any  indication  to  that  effect  being  given ; 
and  when  the  direct  march  is  resumed,  the  guide  will  be,  equally 
without  indication,  on  the  side  where  it  was  previous  to  the  oblique: 

106.  The  instructor  will,  at  first,  cause  the  oblique  to  be  made 
towards  the  side  of  the  guide.  He  will  also  direct  the  captain  to 
have  an  eye  on  the  directing  sergeant,  in  order  to  keep  on  the 
same  perpendicular  line  to  the  front  with  him,  while  following  a 
parallel  direction, 

107.  During  the  continuance  of  the  march,  the  instructor  will 
be  watchful  that  the  men  follow  parallel  directions,  in  conforming 
to  the  principles  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  for  pre- 


64  SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY 


serving  the  general  alignment ;  whenever  the  men  lose  the  align- 
ment, he  will  be  careful  that  they  regain  it  by  lengthening  or 
shortening  the  step,  without  altering  the  cadence,  or  changing  the 
direction. 

108.  The  instructor  will  place  himself  in  front  of  the  company 
and  face  to  it,  in  order  to  regulate  the  march  of  the  directing  ser- 
geant, or  the  man  who  is  on  the  flank  towards  which  the  oblique 
is  made,  and  to  see  that  the  principles  of  the  march  are  properly 
observed,  and  that  the  files  do  not  crowd. 

Akticli:  Fourth. 

To  mark  time,  to  march  in  double  quick  time,  and  tlie  back  step. 

109.  The  company  being  in  the  direct  march  and  in  quick  time' 
the  instructor,  to  cause  it  to  mark  time,  will  command  : 

1.  Mark  time.     2.  March. 

110.  To  resume  the  march,  ho  will  command  : 

1.  Forward.     2.  Makch. 

111.  To  cause,  the  march  in  double  quick  lime,  the  instructor 
will  command : 

1.  Double  quick.     2.  March. 

112.  The  command  march  will  be    pronounced  at  the   instant  ' 
either  foot  is  coming  to  the  ground. 

113.  To  resume  quick  time,  the  instructor  will  command — 

1.  Quick    time.     2.  March. 

114.  The  command  march  will  be  pronounced  at  the  instant 
either  foot  is  coming  to  the  ground- 

115.  The'company  being  at  a  halt,  the  instructor  may  cause 
it  to  march  in  the  back  step  ;  to  this  effect,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Company  backward.     2.  March. 

116.  The  back  step  will  be  executed  according  to  the  princi- 
ples prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier  No.  178,  but  the  use  of 
it  being  rare,  the  instructor  will  not  cause  more  than  fifteen  or 
twenty  steps  to  be  taken  in  succession,  and  to  that  extent  but  sel- 
dom. 

1 17.  The  instructor  ought  not  to  exercise  the  company  in  march- 
ing in  double  quick  time  till  the  men  are  well  established  in  the 
length  and  swiftness  of  the  pace  in  quick  lime:  he  will  then  en. 
dearor  to  render  the  march  of  one  hundred  and  seventy.fire  steps 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY.  65 

in  the  minute  equally  easy  and  familiar,  and  also  cause  them  to 
observe  the  same  erectness  of  body  and  composure  of  mind,  as  if 
marching  in  quick  time. 

118.  When  marching  in  double  quick  time,  if  a  subdivision 
(in  a  column)  has  to  change  direction  by  turning,  or  has  to  form 
into  line,  the  men  will  quicken  the  pace  to  one  hundred  and 
eighty  steps  in  a  minute.  The  same  swiftness  of  step  will  be 
observed  uncer  all  circumstances  where  great  rapidity  of  move- 
ment is  lequired.  But,  as  ranks  of  men  cannot  march  any  length 
of  time  at  so  swift  a  rate,  without  breaking  or  confusion,  this  ac- 
celeration will  not  bo  considered  a  prescribed  exercise,  and  ac- 
cordingly companies  or  battalions  will  only  be  habituallyexercised 
in  the  double  quick  time  of  one  hundred  and  sixty-five  steps  in 
the  minute. 

Article  Fifth. 

To  march  in  retreat. 

119.  The  company  being  halted  and  correctly  aligned,  when 
the  instructor  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  march  in  retrea?,  he  will 
command — 

1.  Company.     2.  About — Pace. 

120.  The  company  having  faced  to  the  rear,  the  instructor  will 
place  himself  in  front  of  the  directing  file,  conforming  to  what  is 
prescribed,  No.  84. 

121.  The  instructor,  being  correctly  established  on  the  prolon- 
gation of  the  directing  file,  will  command — 

3.   Company  forward. 

122.  At  this,  the  directing  sergeant  will  conform  himself  to 
what  is  prescribed,  Nos.  S6  and  87,  with  this  difference — he  will 
place  himself  six  paces  in  front  of  the  line  of  file  closers,  now 
leading. 

123.  The  covering  sergeant  will  step  into  the  line  of  fife  closers, 
opposite  to  his  interval,  and  the  captain  will  place  himself  in  the 
rear  rank,  now  become  the  front. 

124.  This  disposition  being  promptly  made,  the  instructor  will 
command — 

4.  March. 

125.  At  this,  the  directing  sergeant,  the  captain,  and  the  men, 
will  conform  themselves  to  what  is  prescribed  No.  89,  and  follow- 
ing. 

126.  The  instructor  will  cause  to  be  executed,  marching  in  re- 
treat, all  that  is  prescribed  for  marching  in  advance  ;  the  com- 
mands and  the  means  of  execution  will  be  the  same. 

5 


66  SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY. 

127.  The  instructor  having  halted  the  company,  will,  when  he 
may  wish,  cause  it  to  face  to  the  front  by  the  commands  prescri- 
bed Xo.  119.  The  captain,  the  covering  sergeant,  and  the  di- 
recting sergeant,  will  resume  their  habitual  places  in  line,  the 
moment  they  shall  have  faced  about. 

The  company  being  in  march  by  the  front  rank,  if  the 
instructor  should  wish  it  to  march  in  retreat,  he  will  cau-i1  the 
rightabout  to  be  executed  while  marching,  and  to  this  elfect  will 
command — 

1.  Com^  out.    3.  March. 

120.  Ar  the  third  command,  the  company  will  promptly  face 
about,  and  recommence  the  march  by  the  rear  rank. 

130.  The  directing  sergeant  will  face  about  with  the  company, 
and  will  move  rapidly  six  paces  in  front  of  the  file  closers,  and 
upon  the  prolongation  of  the  guide.  The  instructor  will  place 
him  in  the  proper  direction  by  the  means  prescribed  No.  104. 
The  captain,  the  covering  sergeant,  and  the  men,  will  conform  to 
the  principles  prescribed  for  the  march  in  retreat. 

131.  When  lb  wishes  the  company  to  march  by 
the  front  rank,  lie  will  give  the  same  command*,  and  will  regulate 
the  direction  of  the  march  by  the  same  means. 

132.  The  instructor  will  cause  to  be  executed  in  double  quick 
time,  all  the  movements  prescribed  in  the  3d,  4th,  5th,  and  6th 
lessons  of  this  school,  with  the  exception  of  the  march  backwards, 
which  will  be  executed  only  in  quick  time.  He  will  give  the 
same  command-  g  to  add  rhvible  quick  before  the  com- 
mand march. 

133.  When  the  pieces  arc  carried  on  the  right  shoulder,  in 
quick  time,  the  distance  between  the  ranks  will  be  sixteen  inches. 
"Whenever,  therefore,  the  instructor  brings  the  company  from  a 
shoulder  to  this  position,  the  rear  rank  must  shorten  a  little  the 
first  steps  in  order  to  gain  the  prescribed  distance,  and  will  length- 
en  the  steps,  on  the  contrary,  in  order  to  close  up  when  the  pieces 
are  again  brought  to  a  shoulder.  In  marching  in  double  quick 
time,  the  distance  between  the  ranks  will  be  twenty-six  inches, 
and  the  pieces   will  be  carried  habitually  on   the  right  shoulder. 

134.  Whenever  a  company  is  halted,  the  Eien  will  bring  their 
pieces  at  once  to  a  shoulder  at  the  command  halt.  The  rear  rank 
will  close  to  its  proper  distance.     These  rules  are  general. 

LESSON  FOURTH. 

Article   First. 

To  march  by  the  Jlank. 

135.  The  company  being  in  line  of  battle:  and  at  a  halt,  when 


Some  difficulty  having  been  experienced  in  executing  the  move- 
ments in  Lesson  IV,  (page  67,)  Col.  Hardee  was  applied  to  for 
information  upon  the  subject.     Subjoined  is  his  answer. 

In  reply  to  your  first  question,  I  beg  to  say,  that 
if  the  Company  be  marching  to  the  front  and  the  com- 
mand "  Ity  the  right  (or ( left)  Flank"  should  be  given, 
the  men  double  by  fours  in  the  same  manner  as  when  the 
command  "  Right  (or  left)  Face"  is  given  at  a  halt. 

Second  point. — If  the  company  be  faced  to  the  rear, 
and  the  command  ''Left  (or  right)  Face  "  be  given,  No.  1 
of  the  front  rank  faces  at  once  and  stands  fast.  No.  1  of 
the  rear  rank  steps  one  pace  to  the  rear  (his  front)  and  at 
the  same  time  faces  to  the  left.  No.  2  of  the  front  rank 
faces  and  steps  into  the  interval  between  the  front  rank 
men;  and  No.  2  rear  rank  places  himself  on  the  extreme 
right  of  the  set  of  fours,   thus  : 

jf     t=  front  rank, 


2       12         12 
Faced  to  the  rear   ^     ^=     ^r     =     ^F     =  rear  rank. 


Left   face 


The  face  to  the  right  is  made  in  the  same  manner  ex- 
cept the  movement  is  made  on  No.  2  front  rank.  The 
front  refered  to  is  always  the  real  front. 

H^^In  Loading  (p.  19)  most  of  the  instructors  have 
substituted  the  old  system  of  placing  the  piece  by  the 
side  of  the  left  foot,  instead  of  between  the  feet. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY.  67 

the  instructor  shall  wish  to  cause   it  to  march  by  the  right  flank, 
he  will  command  : 

« 
1.  Company,* right — Face.     2.   Forward.     3.  March. 

136.  At  the  first  command,  the  company  will  face  to  the  right, 
the  covering  sergeant  will  place  himself  at  the  head  of  the  front 
rank,  the  captain  having  stepped  out  for  the  purpose,  so  far  as  to  , 
find  himself  by  the  side  of  the  sergeant,  and  on  his  left:  the  front 
rank  will  double  as  is  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  No. 
283  ;  the  rear  rank  will,  at  the  same  time,  side  step  to  the  right 
one  pace,  and  double  in  the  same  manner  ;  so  that  when  the 
movement  is  completed,  the  files  will  be  formed  of  four  men 
aligned,  and  elbow  to  elbow.     The  intervals  will  be  preserved. 

137.  The  file  closers  will  also  move  by  side  step  to  the  right, 
so  that  when  the  ranks  are  formed,  they  will  be  two  paces  from 
the   rearmost  rank. 

138.  At  the  command  march,  the  company  will  move  off  brisk- 
ly in  quick  time  ;  the  covering  sergeant  at  the  head  of  the  front 
rank,  and  the  captain  on  his  left,  will  m  i^ht  forward. 
The  men  of  each  file  will  march  abreast  of  their  respective  frontf 
rank  men,  heads  direct  to  the  front :  the  file  closers  will  march 
opposite  their  places  in  line  of  battle. 

139.  The  instructor  will  cause  the  principles  of  the  march  by 
the  flank  to  be  observed,  in  placing  himselfi  pending  the  march, 
as  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  No.  288. 

140.  The  instructor  will  cause  the  march  by  the  left  flank  to 
be  executed  by  the  same  commands,  substituting  left  for  right ; 
the  ranks  will  double  as  has  been  prescribed  in  the  school  for  the 
soldier,  No.  285  ;  the  rear  rank  will  side-step  to  the  left  one  pace 
before  doubling. 

141.  At  the  instant  the  company  faces  to  the  left,  the  left  guide 
will  place  himself  at  the  head  of  the  front  rank;  the  captain  will 
pass  rapidly  to  the  left,  and  place  himself  by  the  right  side  of  this 
guide  ;  the  covering  sergeant  will  replace  the  captain  in  the  front 
rank,  the  moment  the  latter  quits  it  to  go  to  the  left. 

Article  Second. 
To  change  direction  by  file. 

142.  The  company  being  faced  by  the  flank,  and  either  in 
march,  or  at  a  halt,  when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to 
wheel  by  file,  he  will  command  : 

1.  By  file,  left,  (or  right.)    2.  March. 

143.  At  the  command  march,  the  first  file  will  wheel ;  if  to  the 
side  of  the  front  rank  man,  the  latter  will  take  care  not  to  turn  at 


68  SCHOOL  OF  TlIE  COMPANY. 


once,  but  to  describe  a  short  arc  of  a  circle,  shortening  a  little 
the  first  five  or  six  steps  in  order  to  give  time  to  the  fourth  man  of 
this  file  to  conform  himself  to  the  movement.  If  the  wheel  be  to 
the  side  of  the  rear  rank,  the  front  rank  man  will  wheel  in  the 
step  of  twenty-eight  inches,  and  the  fourth  man  will  conform  him- 
self to  the  movement  by  describing  a  short  arc  of  a  circle  as  has 
been  explained.  Kach  file  will  come  to  wheel  on  the  same 
ground  where  that  which  preceded  it  wheeled. 

144.  The  instructor  will  see  that  the  wheel  be  executed  ac- 
cording to  these  principles,  in  order  that  the  distance  between  the 
files  may  always  he  preserved,  and  thai  there  be  no  check  or 
hindrance  at  the  wheeling  point. 


Article  Third. 

To  hull  the.  company  marching  by  the  flank,  and  to  face  it  to  the 

front. 

145,  To  e fleet  the.se  objects,  the  instructor  will  command — 

1.  Company.      2".  Halt.     3.  Front. 

14G.  The  second  and  third  commands  will  be  executed  as  pre- 
scribed in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  Nos.  290  and  291.  As  soon 
as  the  files  have  undoubled,  the  rear  rank  will  close  to  its  proper 
distance.  The  captain  and  covering  sergeant,  as  well  as  the  left 
guide,  if  the  march  be  by  the  left  flank,  will  return  to  their  habit- 
ual  places  in  line  at  the  instant  the  company  faces  to  the  front. 

147.  The  instructor!  may  then   align  the   company,    by  one  of 
means  prescribed,  No.  100. 

Article  Fourth. 

The  company  being  in  march  by  the  flank,  to  form  it  on  the  right. 
*  {or  left)  by  /He  into  line  of  battle. 

148.  If  the  company  be  marching  by  the  right  flank,  the  in- 
structor will  command  : 

1.   On  tlic  right,  by  file  into  line.     2.  March. 

149.  At  the  command  inarch,  the  rear  rank  men  doubled  will 
mark  time ;  the  captain  and  the  covering  sergeant  will  turn  to 
the  right,  march  straight  forward,  and  be  hailed  by  the  instructor 
when  they  shall  have  passed  at  least  six  paces  beyond  the  rank 
of  file  closers  ;  the    captain    will  place  himself  correctly  on   the 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY.  69 

line  of  battle,  and  will  direct  the  alignment  as  the  men  of  the 
front  rank  successively  arrive  ;  the  covering  sergeant  will  place 
himself  behind  the  captain  at  the  distance  of  the  rear  rank  :  the 
two  men  on  the  right  of  the  front  rank  doubled,  will  continue  to 
march,  and  passing  beyond  the  covering  sergeant  and  the  captain, 
will  turn  to  the  right ;  after  turning,  they  will  continue  to  march 
elbow  to  elbow,  and  direct  themselves  towards  the  line  of  battle, 
but  when  they  shall  arrive  at  two  paces  from  this  line,  the  even 
number  will  shorten  the  step  so  that,  the  odd  number  may  precede 
him  on  the  line,  the  odd  number  placing  himself  by  the  side  and 
on  the  left  of  the  captain  ;  the  even  number  will  afterwards  ob- 
lique to  the  left,  and  place  himself  on  the  left  of  the  odd  number; 
the  next  two  men  of  the  front  rank  doubled,  will  pass  in  the  same 
manner  behind  the  two  first,  turn  then  to  the  right,  and  place 
themselves,  according  to  the  means  just  explained,  to  the  left,  and 
by  the  side  of,  the  two  men  already  established  on  the  line;  the 
remaining  files  of  this  rank  will  follow  in  succession,  and  be  form- 
ed to  the  left  in  the  same  manner.  The  rear  rank  doubled  will 
execute  the  movement  in  the  manner  already  explained  for  the 
front  rank,  taking  care  not  to  commence  the  movement  until  four 
men  of  the  front  rank  are  established  on  the  line  of  battle  ;  the 
rear  rank  men,  as  they  arrive  on  the  line,  will  cover  accurately 
their  file  leaders. 

150.  If  the  company  be  marching  by  the  left  flank,  the  instruc- 
tor will  cause  it  to  form  by  file  on  the  left  into  line  of  battle,  ac- 
cording to  the  same  principles  and  by  the  same  minds,  sub- 
si  ituting  the  indication  left  lor  right.  In  this  cas.,  the  odd  num- 
bers will  shorten  the  step,  so  that  the  even  numliers  may  precede 
them  on  the  line.  The  captain,  placed  on  the  left  of  the  front 
rank,  and  the  left  guide,  will  return  to  their  places  in  line  of  bat- 
tle, by  order  of  the  instructor,  after  the  company  shall  be  formed 
and  aligned. 

151.  To  enable  the  men  the  better  to  comprehend  the  mechan- 
ism of  this  movement,  the  instructor  will  at  first  cause  it  to  be  ex- 
ecuted separately  by  each  rank  douh'.ed,  and  afterwards  by  the 
two  ranks  united  and  doubled. 

152.  The  instructor  will  place  himself  on  the  line  of  battle, 
and  without  the  point  where  the  right  or  left  is  to  rest,  in  order  to 
establish  the  base  of  the  alignment,  and  afterwards,  he  will  fol- 
low up  the  movement  to  assure  himself  that  each  file  conforms 
itself  to  what  is  prescribed  No.  149. 

Article  Fifth. 

The  company  being  in  march  by  the  flank,  to  form  it  by  company, 
or  by  platoon,  into  line,  and  to  cause  it  to  face  to  the  right  and 
left  in  inarching. 

153.  The  company  being  in  march  by  the  right   flank,  the  in- 


7U  S    HOOL  OF  TI1K  COMPANY. 

structor  will    order  the  captain   to  form    it  into    line  ;  the  captain 
will  immediately  command  : 

1.  Bij  company,  into  line  ;     2.  March. 

154.  At  the  command  march,  the  covering  sergeant  will  con- 
tinue to  march  straight  forward;  the  men  will  advance  the  right 
shoulder,  take  the  double  quick  step,  and  move  into  line,  by  the 
shortest  route,  taking  rare  to  undouble  the  file.-,  and  to  come  on 
(he  line  one  after  the  other. 

1  55.  As  the  front  rank  men  successively  arrive  in  line  with  the 
covering  sergeant,  they  will  take  from  him  the  step,  and  then  turn 
their  eyes  to  the  front. 

156.  The  men  of  the  rear  rank  will  conform  to  the  movements 
of  their  respective  file  leaders,  but  without  endeavoring  to  arrive 
ifl  line  at  the  same  time  with  the  latter. 

157.  At  the  instant  the  movement  begins,  the  captain  will  face 
to  his  company  in  order  to  follow  up  the  execution  ;  and,  as  soon 
as  the  company  is  formed,  he  will  command,  guide  left,  place 
Himself  two  paces  before  the  centre,  face  to  the  front,  and  take 
the  step  of  the  company. 

158.  At  the  command  guide  left,  the  second  sergeant  will 
promptly  place  himself  in  the  front  rank,  on  the  left,  to  serve  as 
guide,  and  the  covering  sergeant  who  is  on  the  opposite  flank  will 
remain  there. 

159.  When  the  company  marches  by  the  left  flank,  this  move- 
ment will  be  executed  by  the  same  commands,  and  according  to 
the  same  principles;  the  company  being  formed,  the  captain  will 
command  guide  right,  and  place  himself  in  front  of  his  company 
as  above  ;  the  covering  sergemu  who  is  on  the  right  of  the  front 
rank  will  serve  as  guide,  and  the  second  sergeant  placed  on  the 
left  flank  will  remain  there. 

160.  Thus,  in  a  column  by  company,  right  or  left  in  front,  the 
covering  sergeant  and  the  second  sergeant  of  each  company  will 
always  be  placed  on  the  right  and  left,  respectively,  of  the  front 
rank  ;  they  will  be  denominated  right  guide  and  left  guide,  and 
the  one  or  the  other  charged  with  the  direction. 

161.  The  company  being  in  march  by  the  flank,  if  it  be  the 
wish  of  the  instructor  to  cause  it  to  form  platoons,  he  will  give  an 
order  to  that  effect  to  the  captain,  who  will  command  : 

1.   By  jdatoon,  into  line.     2.  March. 

162.  The  movement  will  be  executed  by  each  platoon  accord- 
ing to  the  above  principles.  The  captain  will  place  himself  be- 
fore the  centre  of  the  first  platoon,  and  the  first  lieutenant  before 
the  centre  of  the  second,  passing  through  the  opening  made  in  the 
centre  of  the  company,  if  the  march  be  by  the  right  flank,  and  around 
•the  left  of  his  platoon,  if  the  march  be  'by  the  left :  in  this  last 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY.  71 

case,  the  captain  will  also  pass  around  the  left  of  the  second  pla- 
toon in  order  to  place  himself  in  front  of  the  first.  Both  the  cap- 
tain'and  lieutenant,  without  waiting  for  each  other,  will  command 
guide  left  (or  right)  at  the  instant  their  respective  platoons  are 
formed. 

163.  At  the  command  guide  left  (or  right,)  the  guide  of  each 
platoon  will  pass  rapidly  to  the  indicated  flank  of  the  platoon,  if 
not  already  there. 

164.  The  right  guide  of  the  company  will  always  serve  as  the 
guide  of  the  right  or  left  of  the  first  platoon,  and  the  left  guide  of 
the  company  will  serve,  in  like  manner,  as  the  guide  of  the  second 
platoon. 

165.  Thus  in  a  column,  by  platoon,  there  will  be  but  one 
guide  to  each  platoon  ;  he  will  always  be  placed  on  its  left  flank, 
if  the  right  be  in  front,  and  on  the  right  flanh,  if  the  left  be  in  front. 

166.  Jn  these  movements,  the  file  closers  will  follow  the  pla- 
toons to  which  they  are  attached. 

167.  The  instructor  may  cause  the  company,  marching  by  the 
flank,  to  form  by  company,  or  by  platoon,  into  line,  by  his  own  di- 
rect commands,  using  those  prescribed  for  the  captain.  No.  153 
or  161. 

168.  The  instructor  will  exercise  the  company  in  passing,  with- 
out  a  halt,  from  the  march  by  the  front,  to  the  march  by  the  flank, 
and  reciprocally.  In  either  case-  he  will  employ  the  commands 
prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier, .No.  294,  substituting  com- 
pany for  squad.  The  company  will  face  to  the  right  or  left,  in 
marching,  and  the  captain,  the  guides,  and  file  closers  will  con- 
form themselves  to  what  is  prescribed  for  each  in  the  march  by 
the  flank,  or  in  the  march  by  the  front  of  a  company  supposed  to 
be  a  subdivision  of  a  column. 

169.  If,  after  facing  to  the  right  or  left,  in  marching,  the  com- 
pany find  itself  faced  by  the  rear  lank,  the  captain  will  place 
himself  two  paces  behind  the  centre  of  the  front  rank,  now  in  the 
rear,  the  guides  will  pass  to  the  rear  rank,  now  leading,  and  the 
file  closers  will  march  in  front  of  this  rank. 

170.  The  instructor,  in  order  to  avoid  fatiguing  the  men,  and 
to  prevent  them  from  being  negligent  in  the  position  of  shoulder 
arms,  will  sometimes  order  support  arms  in  marching  by  the  flank, 
and  arms  on  the  right  shoulder,  when  marching  in  line. 

LESSON  FIFTH. 

Article    First. 

To  break  into  column  by  platoon,   either  at  a  halt  or  in  inarch. 

171.  The  company  being  at  a  halt,  in  line  of  battle,  the  instruc- 
tor, wishing  to  break  it  into  column,  by  platoon  to  the  right,  will 
command — 


72  SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY. 

1.  By  platoon,  right  wheel.      2.  March. 

172.  At  the  first  command,  the  chiefs  of  platoon  will  rapidly 
place  themselves  two  paces  before  the  centres  of  their  respective 
platoons,  the  lieutenant  passing  around  the  left  of  the  company. 
They  need  not  occupy  themselves  with  dressing,  one  upon  the 
other.  The  covering  sergeant  will  replace  the  captain  in  the 
front  rank. 

173.  At  the  command  ?/mrch,  the  right  front  rank  man  of  each 
platoon  will  face  to  the  right,  the  covering  sergeant  standing  fast ; 
the  chief  of  each  platoon  will  move  quickly  by  the  shortest  line, 
a  little  beyond  the  point  at  which  the  marching  flank  will  rest 
when  the  wheel  shall  be  completed,  face  to  the  late  rear,  and 
place  himself  so  that  the  line  which  he  forms  with  the  man  on  the 
right  (who  had  faced,)  shall  be  perpendicular  to  that  occupied  by 
the  company  in  line  of  battle  ;  each  platoon  will  wheel  according 
to  the  principles  prescribed  for  the  wheel  on  a  fixed  pivot,  and 
when  the  man  who  conducts  the  marching  flank  shall  approach 
near  to  the  perpendicular,  its  chief  will  command  : 

1.  Platoon.      2.  Halt. 

174.  At  the  command  halt,  which  will  be  given  at  the  instant 
the  man  who  conducts  the  marching  flank  shall  have  arrived  at 
three  paces  from  the  perpendicular,  the  platoon  will  halt;  the 
covering  sergeant  will  move  to  the  point  where  the  left  of  the 
first  platoon  is  to  rest,  passing  by  the  front  rank  ;  the  second  ser- 
geant will  place  himself,  in  like  manner,  in  respect  to  the  second 
platoon.  Each  will  take  care  to  leave  between  himself  and  the 
man  on  the  right  of  his  platoon,  a  space  equal  to  its  front  ;  the 
captain  and  first  lieutenant  will  look  to  this,  and  each  take  care 
to  align  the  sergeant  between  himself  and  the  man  of  the  platoon 
who  had  faced  to  the  right. 

175.  The  guide  of  each  platoon,  being  thus  established  on  the 
perpendicular,  each  chief  will  place  himself  two  paces  outside  ol 
his  guide,  and  facing  towards  him,  will  command  : 

3.  Left—  Dress. 

176.  The  alignment  being  ended,  each  chief  of  platoon  will 
command,  Front,  and  place  himself  two  paces  before  its  centre. 

177.  The  file  closers  will  conform  themselves  to  the  movement 
of  their  respective  platoons,  preserving  always  the  distance  of  two 
paces  from  the  rear  rank. 

178.  The  company  will  break  by  platoon  to  the  left,  according 
to  the  same  principles.     The  instructor  will  command: 

• 
1.  By  platoon,   left  wheel.     2.  March. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY.  73 


179.  The  first  command  will  be  executed  in  the  same  manner 
as  if  breaking  by  platoon  to  the  right. 

180.  At  the  command  march,  the  left  front  rank  man  of  each 
platoon  will  face  to  the  left,  and  the  platoons  will  wheel  to  the  left, 
according  to  the  principles  prescribed  for  the  wheel  on  a  fixed 
pivot;  the  chiefs  of  platoon  will  conform  to  the  principles  indi- 
cated Nos.  173  and  174. 

181.  \t  the  command  hall,  given  by  the  chief  of  each  platoon, 
the  covering  sergeant  on  the  right  of  the  front  rank  of  the  first 
platoon,  and  the  second  sergeant  near  the  left  of  the  second  pla- 
toon, will  each  move  to  the  points  where  the  right  of  his  platoon 
is  to  rest.  The  chief  of  each  platoon  should  be  careful  to  align 
the  sergeant  between  himself  and  the  man  of  the  platoon  who 
had  facej  to  the  left,  and  will  then  command  : 

Right. — Dress. 

182.  The  platoons  being  aligned,  each  chief  of  platoon  will 
command,  Front,  and  place  himself  opposite  its  centre. 

183.  The  instructor  wishing  to  break  the  company  by  platoon 
to  the  right,  and  to  move  the  column  forward  after  the  wheel  is 
completed,  will  caution  the  company  to  that  effect,  and  command  : 

1.  By  platoon,  right  wheel.     2.   March. 

184.  At  the  first  command,  the  chiefs  of  platoon  will  move 
rapidly  in  front  of  their  respective  platoons,  conforming  lo  what 
has  been  prescribed  No.  172,  and  will  remain  in  this  position  du- 
ring the  continuance  of  the  wheel.  The  covering  sergeant  will 
replace  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon  in  the  front  rank. 

185.  At  the  command  march,  the  platoons  will  wheel  to  the 
right,  conforming  to  the  principles  herein  prescribed  :  the  man  on 
the  pivot  will  not  face  to  the  right,  but  will  mark  time,  conform- 
ing himself  to  the  movement  of  the  marching  flank  ;  and  when 
the  man  who  is  on  the  left  of  this  flank  shall  arrive  near  the  per- 
pendicular, the  instructor  will  command  : 

3.  Forward.     4.   March.     5.  Guide  left. 

186.  At  the  fourth  command,  which  will  be  given  at  the  instant 
the  wheel  is  completed,  the  platoons  will  move  straight  to  the 
front,  all  the  men  taking  the  step  of  twenty-eight  inches.  The 
covering  sergeant  and  the  second  sergeant  will  move  rapidly  to 
the  lett  of  their  respective  platoons,  the  former  passing  before  the 
front  rank.  The  leading  guide  will  immediately  take  points  on 
the  ground  in  the  direction  which  may  be  indicated  to  him  by  the 
instructor. 

187.  At  the  fifth  command,  the  men  will  take  the  touch  of  el- 
bows lightly  to  the  left. 


74  SCHOOL  OF   THE  COMPANY. 

188.  If  the  guide  of  the  second  platoon  should  lose,  his  distance, 
or  the  line  of  direction,  he  will  conform  to  the  principles  herein 
prescribed  Nos.  202  and  20:i. 

189.  If  the  company  he  marching  in  line  to  the  front,  the  in- 
structor will  cause  it  to  break  by  platoon  to  the  right  by  the  same 
commands.  At  the  command  inarch,  the  platoons  will  wheel  in 
the  manner  already  explained  ;  the  man  on  the  pivot  will  take 
care  to  mark  time  in  his  place,  without  advancing  or  receding;  the 
instructor,  the  chiefs  of  platoon,  and  the  guides,  will  conform  to 
what  has  been  prescribed  Nos.    184  and  following. 

190.  The  company  may  be  broken  by  platoons  to  the  left,  ac- 
cording to  the  same  principles,  and  by  inverse  means,  the  instruc- 
tor giving  the  commands  prescribed  Nos.  183  and  185,  substitu- 
ting left  for  right,  and  reciprocally. 

191.  The  movements  explained  in  Xos.  188  and  189  will  only 
be  executed  after  the  company  has  become  well  established  in  the 
principles  cf  the  march  in  column.  Articles  Second  and  Third. 

Remarks. 

192.  The  instructor,  placed  in  front  of  the  company,  will  ob- 
serve whether  the  movement  be  executed  according  to  the  princi- 
ples prescribed  above  ;  whether  the  piatoons,  after  breaking  into 
column,  are  perpendicular  to  the  line  of  battle  just  occupied  ;  and 
whether  the  guide,  who  placed  himself  where  the  marching  flank 
of  his  platoon  had  to  rest,  has  left,  between  himself  and  the  front 
rank  man  on  the  right  (or  left.)  the  space  necessary  to  contain 
the  front  of  the  platoon. 

193.  After  the  platoons  have  broken,  if  the  rearmost  guide 
should  not  accurately  cover  the  leading  one,  he  will  not  seek  to 
correct  his  position  till  the  column  be  put  in  march,  unless  the  in- 
structor, wishing  to  wheel  immediately  into  line,  should  think  it 
necessary  to  rectify  the  direction  of  the  guides,  which  would  be 
executed  as  will  be  hereinafter  explained  in  Article  Fifth  of  this 
Lesson. 

194.  The  instructor  will  observe,  that  the  man  on  the  right  (or 
left)  of  each  platoon,  who,  at  the  command  inarch,  laces  to  the 
right  (or  left)  being  the  true  pivot  of  the  wheel,  the  front  rank 
man  next  to  him  ought  to  gain  a  little  ground  to  the  front  in  wheel- 
ing, so  as  to  clear  the  pivot-man. 

Article  Second. 

To    march    in    column. 

195.  The  company  having  broken  by  platoon,  right  (or  left) 
in  front,  the  instructor,  wishing  to  cause  the  column  to  march, 
will  throw  himself  twenty  five  or  thirty  paces  in  front,  face  to  the 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY.  75 

guides,  place  himself  correctly,  on  their  direction,  and    caution 
the  leading  guide  to  take  points  on  the  ground. 

196.  The  instructor  being  thus  placed,  the  guide  of  the  leading 
platoon  will  take  two  points  on  the  ground  in  the  straight  line  pas- 
sing between  his  own  and  the  heels  of  the  instructor. 

197.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  instructor  will  step 
aside,  and  command  :  v 

1.   Column,  forward.     2.  Guide  left   (or  right.)     3.  Makch. 

198.  At  the  command  march,  promptly  repeated  by  the  chiefs 
of  platoon  they,  as  well  as  the  guides,  will  lead  off,  by  a  decided 
step,  their  respective  platoons,  in  order  that  the  whole  may  move 
smartly,  and  at  the  same  moment. 

199.  The  men  will  each  feel  lightly  the  elbow  of  his  neighbor 
towards  the  guide,  and  conform  himself,  in  marching,  to  the  prin- 
ciples prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  No.  253.  The  man 
next  to  the  guide,  in  each  platoon,  will  take  care  never  to  pass  him, 
and  also  to  march  always  about  six  inches  to  the  right  (or  left)  from 
him,  in  order  not  to  push  him  out  of  the  direction. 

200.  The  leading  guide  will  observe,  with  the  greatest  preci- 
sion, the  length  and  cadence  of  the  step,  and  maintain  the  direc- 
tion of  his  march  by  the  means  prescribed  No.  89. 

201.  The  following  guide  will  march  exactly  in  the  trace  of 
the  leading  one,  preserving  between  the  latter  and  himself  a  dis- 
tance precisely  equal  to  the  front  of  his  platoon,  and  marching  in 
the  same  step  with  the  leading  guide. 

202.  If  the  following  guide  lose  his  distance  from  the  one  lead- 
ing, (which  can  only  htppen  by  his  own  fault,)  he  will  correct 
himself  by  slightly  lengthening  or  shortening  a  few  steps,  in  order 
that  there  may  not  be  sudden  quickenings  cr  slackenings  in  the 
march  of  his  platoon. 

203.  If  the  same  guide,  having  neglected  to  march  exactly  in 
the  trace  of  the  preceding  one,  find  himself  sensibly  out  of  the 
direction,  he  will  remedy  this  fault  by  advancing  more  or  less  the 
shoulder  opposite  to  the  true  direction,  and  thus,  in  a  few  steps, 
insensibly  regain  it,  without  the  inconvenience  of  theoblique  step, 
which  would  cause  a  loss  of  distance.  In  all  cases,  each  chief  of 
platoon  will  cau3e  it  to  conform  to'  the  movements  of  its  guide. 

Remarks  on  the  march   in   column. 

204.  If  the  chiefs  and  guides  of  subdivisions  neglect  to  lead  off 
and  to  decide  the  march  from  the  first  step,  the  march  will  be  be- 
gun in  uncertainty,  which  will  cause  waverings,  a  loss  of  step, 
and  a  loss  of  distance. 

205.  If  the  leading  guide  take  unequal  steps,  the  march  of  his 
subdivision,  and  that  which  follows,  will  be  uncertain  ;  there  will 
be  undulations,  quickenings,  and  slackenings  in  the  march. 


76  SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY. 


206.  If  (he  same  guide  be  not  habituated  to  prolong  a  given 
direction,  without  deviation,  he  will  describe  a  crooked  line,  and 
the  column  must  wind  to  conform  itself  to  such  line. 

207.  If  the  following  guide  be  not  habituated  to  march  in  the 
trace  of  the  preceding  one,  he  will  lose  his  distance  at  every  mo- 
ment in  endeavors  to  regain  the  trace,  the  preservation  of  which  is 
the  most  important  principle  in  the  march  in  column. 

208.  The  guide  of  each  subdivision  i:i  column  will  be  respon- 
sible for  the  direction,  distance  and  step:  the  chief  of  the  subdi- 
vision, for  the  order  and  conformity  of  his  subdivision  with  the 
movements  of  the  guide.  Accordingly,  the  chief  will  frequently 
turn,  in  the  march,  to  observe  his  subdivision. 

209.  The  instructor,  placed  on  the  flank  of  the  guides,  will 
watch  over  the  execution  of  all  the  principles  prescribed;  he  will, 
also,  sometimes  place  himself  in  the  rear,  align  himself  on  the 
guides,  and  halt,  pending  some  thirty  paces  together,  to  verify  the 
accuracy  of  the  guides. 

210.  In  column,  chiefs  of  subdivision  wili  always  repeat,  with 
the  greatest  promptitude,  the  commands  march  and  hall,  no  chief 
waiting  for  another,  but  each  repeating  the  command  the  moment 
he  ^catches  it  from  tjie  instructor.  They  will  repeat  no  other 
command  given  by  him  ;  but  will  explain,  if  necessary,  to  their 
subdivisions,  in  an  under  tone  of  voice,  what  they  will  have  to 
execute,  as  indicated  by  the  commands  of  caution. 

Article  Third. 
To  change   direction. 

211.  The  changes  of  direction  of  a  column  while  marching, 
will  be  executed  according  to  the  principles  prescribed  for  wheel- 
ing on  the  march.  Whenever,  therefore,  a  column  is  to  change 
direction,  the  instructor  will  change  the  guide,  if  not  already  there, 
to  the  flank  opposite  the  side  to  which  the  change  is  to   be  made. 

212.  The  column  being  in  march  right  in  front,  if  it  be  the 
wish  of  the  instructor  to  change  direction  to  the  right,  he  will 
give  the  order  to  the  chci,  of  the  first  platoon,  and  immediately 
go  himself,  or  send  a  marker  to  the  point  at  which  the  change  of 
direction  is  to  be  made  ;  the  instructor  or  marker,  will  place 
himself  on  the  direction  of  the  guides,  so  as  to  present  the  breast 
to  that  flank  of  the  column. 

213.  The  leading  guide  will  direct  his  march  on  that  person 
so  that,  in  passing,  his  left  arm  may  just  graze  his  breast.  When 
the  leading  guide  shall  have  approached  near  to  thfe  marker,  the 
chief  of  his  platoon  will  command  : 

1.  Right  wheel.    2.  March. 

214.  The  first  command  will  be  given  when  the  platoon  is  at 
the  distance  of  four  paces  frem  the  marker. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY.  77 

215.  At  the  command  march,  which  will  be  pronounced  at  the 
instant  the  guide  shall  have  arrived  opposite  the  marker,  the 
platoon  will  wheel  to  the  right,  conforming  to  what  is  prescribed 
in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  No.  227. 

216.  The  wheel  being  finished,  the  chief  of  each  platoon  will 
command : 

3.  Forward.     4.  March. 

217.  These  commands  will  be  pronounced  and  executed  as 
prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  Nos.  229  and  230.  The 
guide  of  the  first  platoon  will  lake  points  on  the  ground  in  the  new 
direction,  in  order  the  belter  to  regulate  the  mirch. 

218.  The  second  platoon  will  continue  to  march  straight  for- 
ward till  up  with  the  marker,  when  it  will  wheel  to  the  right., 
and  retake  the  direct  march  by  the  same  commands  and  the 
same  means  which  governed  the  first  platoon. 

219.  The  column  being  in  march  right  in  front,  if  the  instruc- 
tor should  wish  to  change  the  direction  to  the  left,  he  will  com- 
mand, guide  right.  At  this  command,  the  two  guides  will  move 
rapidly  to  the  right  of  iheir  respective  platoons,  each  passing  in 
front  ofhis^  subdivision;  the  men  will  take  the  touch  of  elbows 
to  the  right;  the  instructor  will  afterwards  conform  to  what  is 
prescribed  No.  212. 

220.  The  change  ot  direction  to  the  left  will  then  be  executed 
acording  to  the  same  principles  as  the  change  of  direction  to  the 
right,  hut  by  inverse  means. 

221.  When  the  change  of  direction  is  completed,  the  in- 
structor  will  command,  guide  left. 

222.  The  changes  of^direction  in  a  column,  left  in  front,  will 
be  executed  according  to  the  same  principles 

223.  In  changes  of  direction  in  double  quick  time,  the  platoons 
will  wheel  according  to  the  principles  prescribed  in  the  school  of 
the  soldier,  No.  335. 

224.  In  order  to  prepare  the  men  for  those  formations  in  line, 
which  can  be  executed  only  by  turning  to  the  right  or  the  left,  the 
instructor  will  sometimes  cause  the  column  to  change  direction  to 
the  side  of  the  guide.  In  this  case,  the  chief  of  the  leading  pla- 
toon will  command  :  Left  (or  right)  turn,  instead  of  left  ot  right 
wheel.  The  subdivisions  will  each  turn,  in  succession,  confirm- 
ing to  what  is  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier  No.  333. 
The  leading  guide  as  soon  as  he  has  turned,  will  take  points  on 
the  ground,  the  better  to  regulate  the  direction  of  the  march. 

225.  It  is  highly  important,  in  order  to  preserve  distances  and 
direction,  that  all  the  subdivisions  of  the  column  should  change  di- 
rection precisely  at  the  point  where  the  leading  subdivision 
changed  ;  it  is  for  this  reason  that  that  point  ought  to  be  marked 
in  advance,  and  that  it  is  prescribed  that  the  guides  direct  their 
march   on  tin  marker,  also  that  each  chief  of  subdivision  shall 


18  SCHOOL  OF  T11K  COMPANY. 

not  cause  the  change  to  commence  till  the  guide  of  his  subdivision 
has  grazed  the  breast  of  this  marker. 

226.  Each  chief  will  take  care  tlfat  his  subdivision  arrives  at 
the  point  of  change  in  a  square  with  the  line  of  direction  :  with 
this  view,  he  will  face  to  his  subdivision  when  the  one  which 
precedes  has  commenced  to  turn  or  to  wheel,  and  he  will  be 
watchful  that  it  continues  to  march  squarely  until  it  arrives  at  the 
point  where  the  change  of  direction  is  to  commence. 

227.  If,  in  changes  of  direction,  the  pivot  of  the  subdivision 
v.hich  wheels  should  not  clear  the  wheeling  point,  the  next  subdi- 
vision would  be  arrested  and  distances  lost ;  for  the  guide  who 
conducts  the  marching  flank  having  to  describe  an  arc,  in  length 
about  a  half  greater  than  the  front  of  the  subdivision,  the 
second  subdivision  would  be  already  up  with  the  wheeling  point, 
whilst  the  first  which  wheels  has  yet  the  half  of  its  front  to  exe- 
cute, and  hence  would  be  obliged  to  mark  time  until  that  half  be 
executed.  It  is  therefore  prescribed,  that  the  pivot  of  each  sub 
division  should  take  steps  of  nine  or  eleven  inches  in  length,  ac- 
cording the  the  swiftness  of  the  gait,  in  order  not  to  arrest  the 
march  of  the  next  subdivision.  The  chiefs  of  subdivision  will 
look  well  to  the  step  ot  the  pivot,  and  cause  his  step  to  be  lengthen- 
ed or  shortened  as  may  be  judged  necessary.  By  the  nature  of 
this  movement,  the  centre  of  each  subdivision  will  bend  a  little  to 
the  rear. 

221.  The  guides  will  never  alter  the  length  or  cadence  of  the 
step,  whether  the  change  of  direction  be  to  the  side  of  the  guide  or 
to  the  opposite  side. 

229.  The  marker,  placed  at  the  wheeling  point,  will  always 
present  his  breast  to  the  flank  of  the  column.  The  instructor 
will  take  the  greatest  pains  in  causing  the  prescribed  principles 
to  be  observed ;  he  will  see  that  each  subdivision  only  commences 
the  change  of  direction  when  the  guide,  grazing  the  breast  of  the 
marker,  has  nearly  passed  him,  and,  that  the  marching  flank 
does  not  describe  the  arc  of  too  large  a  circle,  in  order  that  it 
may  not  be  thrown  beyond  the  new  direction. 

230.  In  change  of  direction  by  wheel,  the  guide  of  the  wheel- 
ing flank  will  cast  his  eyes  over  the  ground  at  the  moment  of  com- 
mencing the  wheel,  and  will  describe  an  arc  of  a  circle  whose 
radius  is  equal  to  the  front  of  the  subdivision. 

Article  Fourth. 

To  halt  the  column. 

231.  The  column  being  in  march,  when  the  instructor  shall 
wish  to  halt  it,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Column.     2.  Halt. 


HOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY.  19 

232.  At  the  second  command,  promptly  repeated  by  the 
chiefs  of  platoon,  the  column  will  halt  ;  the  guides  also 
will  stand  fast,  although  they  ma}-  have  lost  both  distance 
and  direction. 

233.  If  the  command  halt,  be  not  repeated  with  the  great- 
est vivacity,  and  executed  at  the  same  instant,  distances  will 
be  lost.  , 

234'.  If  a  guide,  having  lost  his  distance,  seek  to  recover 
it  after  that  command,  he  will  only  throw  his  fault  on  the 
following  guide,  who,  if  he  have  marched  well,  will  no  lon- 
ger be  at  his  proper  distance  :  and  if  the  latter  regain  what 
he  has  thus  lost,  the  movement  will  be]  ited  to  the  rear 

of  the  column. 

Article  Fifth. 

Ueingtin  colv/mn  by  platoon,  to  form  to  the  r 
of  I  "  or  on  tlie  march. 

235.  The  instructor  having  halted  the  c  dumn,  right  in 
front,  and  wishing  to  form  it  into  line  of  battle,  will  place 
himself  at  platoon  distance  in  front  of  '  ling  guide, 

face  to  him.   and   rectify,   if  necessary,   the  positftm  of  the 
guide  beyond  :  which  I  ■  will  cot 

command,  which  will  not  be  repeated  by  the 
chiefs  of  platoon,  each  of  them  will  place  himself  briskly 
two  paces  outside  of  his  guide,  and  direct  the  alignment  of 
the  platoon  perpendicularly  to  the  direction  of  the  column. 

237.  Each  chief  having  aligned  his  platoon,  will  command 
Front,  and  return  quickly  to  his  place  in  column. 

238.  This  disposition  being  mado,  the  instructor  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  Left  into  line,  wheel.     2.  March. 

239.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by  the  chiefs 
of  platoon,  the  front  rank  men  on  the  left  of  each  platoon 
will  face  to  the  left,  and  place  his  breast  lightly  against  the 
arm  of  the  guide  by  his  side,  who  stands  fast  ;  the  platoons 
will  wheel  to  the  left  on  the  principle  of  wheels  from  a  halt, 
and  in  conformity  to  what  is  prescribed  125.  Each  chief  will 
turn  to  his  platoon  to  observe  its  movement,  and  when  the 
marching  flank  has  approached  near  the  line  of  battle,  he  will 
command  : 

1.  Platoon.     2.  Halt. 
2-10.  The  command  halt  will  be  given  when  the  marching 


80  SCHOOL  OK  THE  COMPANY. 

flank  of  the  platoon  is  three  paces  from  the  line  of  battle. 

241.  The  chief  of  the  second  platoon,  having  halted  it,  will 
return  to  his  place  as  a  file  closer,  passing  around  the  left 
of  his  subdivision. 

242.  The  captain  having  halted  the  first  platuon,  will 
move  rapidly  to  the  point  at  which  the  right  of  the  company 
will  rest  in  line  of  battle,  and  command  : 

Right — Due.— 

24o.  At  this  command,  the  two  platoons  will  dress  up  on 
the  alignment  ;  the  front  rank  man  on  the  right  of  the  leading 
platoon,  who  finds  himself  opposite  the  instructor  established 
on  the  direction  of  the  guides,  will  place  his  breast  lightly 
against  the  left  arm  of  this  officer.  The  captain  will  direct 
the  alignment  from  the  right  on  the  man  on  the  opposite 
flank  of  the  Company. 

244.  The  company  being  aligned,  the  captain  will  command: 

Front. 

245.  The  instructor  seeing  the  company  in  line  of  battle, 
will  command  : 

Guides — Posts. 
1.  Right  into  live  wheel.     2.  Mak>  :i. 

246.  At  this  command,  the  covering  sergeant  will  cover 
the  captain,  and  the  left  guide  will  return  to  his  place  as  a 
file  closer. 

247.  If  the  column  be  left  in  front,  and  the  instructor 
should  wish  to  form  it  to  the  right  into  line  of  battle,  he  will 
place  himself  at  platoon  distance  in  front  of  the  leading 
guide,  face  to  him,  and  rectify,  if  necessary,  the  position  of 
the  guide  beyond  ;  which  being  executed,  he  will  command  : 

248.  At  the  command  march,  the  front  rank  man  on  the 
right  of  each  platoon  will  face  to  the  right  and  place  his 
breast  lightly  against  the  left  arm  of  the  guide  by  his  side, 
who  stands  fast;  each  platoon  will  wheel  to  the  right,  and  will 
be  halted  by  its  chief,  when  the  marching  Hank  has  ap- 
proached near  the  line  of  battle  ;  for  this  purpose,  the  chief 
of  each  platoon  will  command  : 

1.  Platoon.     2.  Halt. 

249.  The  command  halt,  will  be  given  when  the  marching 
Hank  of  the  platoon  is  three  paces  from  the  line  of  battle. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY 

The  chief  of  the  second  platoon   having   halted  his  platoor:, 
will  resume  his  place  in  the  rank  of  file  closers. 

250.  The  captain  having  halted  the  first  platoon,  will  inovo 
briskly  to  the  point  at  which  the  left  of  the  company  will 
•rest,  and  command  : 

Left — Dress. 

251.  At  this  command,  the  two  platoons  will  dress  up  on 
the  alignment  ;  the  man  on  the  left  of  the  second  platoor, 
opposite  the  instructor,  will  place  his  breast  lightly  against 
the  right  arm  of  his  officer,  and  the  captain  will  direct  the 
alignment  from  the  left  on  the  man  on  the  opposite  flank  of 
the  Company's 

252.  The  company  being  aligned,  the  captain  will  con: 
tnand  : 

Pront,  * 

L'53.  The  instructor  will  afterwards  command  : 
Guides — Posts. 

254.  At  this  command,  the  captain  Avill  move  to  tho  right  c 
his  company;  the  covering  sergeant  will  cover  him,  aud  the  left 
guide  will  return  to  his  plate  as  a  tile  closer. 

255.  The  instructor  may  omit  the  command  left  or  right  dress, 
.previous  to  commanding  left  or  right  into  line,  wheel,  unlesp, 
after  rectifying  the  pos.tion  of  ihe  guides,  it  should  become 
necessary  to  redress  the  platoons,  or  one  of  them,  laterally  io 
the  right  or  left. 

256.  The  instructor,  before  the  command  left  (or  right)  into 
Unr,  wheel,  will  assme  himself  that  the  rearmost  platoon  is  at 
its  exact  wheeling  distance  from  the  one  in  fiont.  This  attention 
is  important,  in  order  to  detect  negligence  on  the  part  of  guides 
in  this  essential  point. 

257.  If  the  column  be  marching  right  in  front,  and  the  in- 
structor should  wish  to  form  it  in  10  line  without  LaUing  the 
column,  ho  will  give  the  command  prescribed  No.  1G9,  and 
move  rapidly  to  platoon  distance  in  front  of  the    leading  guid#. 

253.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by  the  ehiefa 
the  left  guides  will  halt  short,  the  instructor,  the  chiefs  of  pla- 
toon, and  the  p'atoons,  will  conform  to  what  is  presented  No. 
160  and  following. 

259.  If  the  column  be  in  march  left  in  front,  this  formation 
will  be  made  according  to  the  same  principles,  and  by  inverso 
means. 

260.  If  the  column  be  marching  right  in  front,  and  the  in- 
structor should  wish  to  form  it  into  line  without  halting  the 
column,  and  to  march  the  company  in  line  to  the  front,  he  will 
command  : 

1.  By  platoons  left  whed     2.  March. 
6 


-•'lruOL  OF  Till-:  COMPANY. 


201.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by  the  chiefs 
of  platooq,  the  left  guides  will  hah  :  the  man  next  to  the  left 
guide  in  each  platoon  will  mark  lime  :  the  platoons  will  whe 
the  left,  conforming-  to  the  principles  of  the  wheel  on  a  fixed 
pivot.  When  the  right  of  the  platoons  shall  arrive  near  the 
line  of  battle,  the  instructor  will  command  : 

3.  Forward.     4.  March,     o.   Guide  right  (or  left.) 

262.  At  the  fourth  command,  given  at   the  instance  the  wheel 
is  completed,  all  the  men  of  the  company  will  move  off  together 
with  the  stcpof  twenty-eight  inches;  tho    captain,  the    chief  ••:" 
the  second  platoon,  the  covering    sergeant,    and    the    left  gu'.'o 
will  take  their  position  as  in  line  of  battle. 

263.  At  the  fifth  command,  which  will  be  given  immediately 
after  the  fourth,  the  captain%nd  covering  sergeant,  if  not  already 
there,  will  move  briskly  to  the  side  on  which  the  guide  is  de- 
signated. The  non-commissioned  officer  charged  with  the  ui- 
rection  will  move  rapidly  in  front  of  the  guide,  a»d  will  be  as- 
sured in  his  line  of  march  by  the  instructor,  as  is  prescribe  I 
No.  104'.  That  non  commissioned  officer  will  immediately  take 
points  on  the  ground  as  indicated  in  the  same  number.  The 
men  will  take  the  touch  of  elbows  to  the  side  of  the  guide,  con- 
forming themselves  to  the  principle  of  the  march  *in  line. 

264.  The  same  principles  are  applicable  to  a  column  left  in 
front. 

LESSON  SIXTH. 

Article  First. 

To  break  the  company  into  platoons,  add  to   reform  tht    t 

To  break  the  company  into  platoons. 

265.  The  company  marching  in  the  cadenced  step,  and  sup- 
posed to  make  part  of  a  column,  light  in  front,  when  the  in- 
structor shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  break  by  platoons,  he  will  give 
the  order  to  the  captain,  who  will  command  :  1.  Break  -into 
platoons,  and  immediately  place  himself  beforo  the  centre  of  the 
first  platoon. 

266.  At  the  command  break  into  platoons,  the  first  lieutenant 
will  pass  quickly  around  the  left,  to  the  centre  of  his  platoon, 
and  give  the  caution  :  Mark  time. 

267.  The  captain  will  then  command  :  2.  March. 

268.  The  first   platoou    will  continue  to   march   straight   for- 
ward ;  the  covering  sergeant  will  move  rapidly  to   the  left  flank 
of  this  platoon  (passing  by  the  front  rank)  as  soon  as  the  flaak  • 
shall  be  disengaged. 


SCHOOL  OP  THE  COMPANY. 

2fi9.  At  the  command  march,  given  by  the  captain,  the 
second  platoon  will  begin  to  mark  time  ;  its  chief  will  immedi- 
ately add :  1.  Right  oblique;  2.  March.  The  last  command 
will  be  given  so  th.-it  this  platoon  may  commence  obliquing  the 
instant  the  rear  rank  of  the  first  platoon  shall  have  passed.  The 
men  will  shorten  the  step  in  obliquing,  so  that  when  the  com- 
mand forward  march  is  given,  the  platoon  may  have  its  exact 
distance. 

270.  The  guide  of  the  second  platoon  being  near  the  direc- 
tion of  the  guide  of  the  first,  the  chief  of  the  second  will  com- 
mand Forward,  and  add  March,  the  instant  that  the  guide  of 
his  platoon  shall  cover  the  guide  of  the  first. 

271.  In  a  column,  left  in  front,  the  company  will  break  into 
platoons  by  inverse  meant,  applying  to  the  first  platoon  all  that 
has  been  prescribed  for  the  second,  and  reciprocally. 

272.  In  this  case,  the  left  guide  of  the  company  will  shift  to 
the  right  flank  of  the  second  platoon,  and  the  covering  sergeant 
will  remain  on  the  right  of  the  first. 

To  re-form  the  company. 

273.  The  column,  by  platoon,  being  in  march,  right  in  front, 
when  the  instructor"  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  form  company,  he 
will  give  the  order  to  the  captain,  who  will  command  :  Form 
company. 

274.  Having  given  this  command,  the  captain  will  immedi- 
ately add  :  1.   First  Platoon  ;  2.  Right  oblique. 

275.  The  chief  of  the  second  platoon  will  caution  it  to  con- 
tinue to  march  straight  forward. 

270.  The  captain  will  then  command  :   3.  March. 

277.  At  this  command,  repeated  by  the  chief  of  the  second, 
the  first  platoon  will  oblique  io  the  right,  in  order  to  unmask  the 
second  ;  the  covering  sergeant,  on  the  left  of  the  first  platoon, 
will  return  to  the  right  of  the  company,  passing  by  the  front 
rank. 

278.  When  the  first  platoon  shall  have  nearly  unma-ked  the 
second,  the  captain  will  command :  1.  Marl' time,  and  at  the 
instant  the  unmasking  shall  be  complete; he  will  add  :  2.  March. 
The  first  platoon  will  then  cease  to  oblique,  and  mark  time. 

280.  In  the  mean  time  the  second  platoon  will  have  continued 
to  march  straight  forward,  and  when  it  shall  be  nearly  up  with 
the  first,  the  captain  will  command  Forward,  and  at  the  instant 
the  two  platoons  shall  unite,  add  March  ;  the  first  platoon  will 
then  cease  to  mark  time. 

280.  In  a  column,  left  in  front  the  same  movement  will  he  execu- 
ted by  inverse  means,  the  chief  of  the  second  platoon  giving  the 
command  Forward,  and  the  captain  adding  the  command  March, 
ifhen  the  platoons  are  united. 

'281.  The  guide  of  the  second  platoon,  on  fts   right,  will  pass 


84  <  MOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY. 


to  its  left  Hank  tho  moment  the  platoon  begins  to  oblique  ;  the 
guide  of  the  first,  on  its  right,  remaining  on  that  flauk  of  the 
platoon. 

The  instructor  will  also  sometimes  cnu?e  the  company  t'- 
hreak  and  re-form,  by  platoon,  by  bis  own  direct   commands. 
Tn  this  case,  ho  will  give  the   general  commands   prescribed    for 
the  captain  above  :   1.  Break   ir.to   -platoons;  2.  March;  an  i   I 
Form  company  ;  2    March. 

283.  It,  in  breaking  the  company  into  platoons,  tho  subdi- 
vision that  breaks  olT  should  mark  time  too  long,  it  might,  in  a 
column  of  m:iny  subdivisions,  arrest  the  march  of  iho  follow- 
ing one,  which  would  cause  a  lengthening  of  the  column,  and  :i 
loss  of  distances. 

284.  In  breaking  into  platoons,  it  is  rececsary  that  tho  platoons 
which  oblique  should  not  shorten  the  step  too  much,  in  order  not 
to  lose  distance  in  column,  ai.d  not  to  arrest  tho  march  of  tho 
following  subdivision. 

275.  If  a  pla'oon  obliqurs  too  far  to  a  flank,  it  would  be 
obliged  to  oblique  again  to  the  opposite  flank,  to  regain  the  direc- 
tion, and  by  ihe  douUe  movement  arrest  probably,  the  march 
of  the  following  subdivision, 

286.  Tho  chiefs  of  those  platoons  which  oblique  will  fa?* 
to  their  platoons,  in  order  to  enforce  the  observance  of  the  fore- 
going principles. 

287.  When,  in  a  column  of  several  companies,  they  break  iu 
succession,  it  is  of  the  greatest  importance  tliai  each  company 
should  continue  to  march  in  the  same  st  p,  without  shortening 
or  slackening,  whilst  that  which  precedes  breaks,  a  though  the 
following  company  should  close  up  on  the  preceding  one.  This 
attention  is  essential  to  guard  against  an  elongation  of  tho 
column. 

288.  Faults  of  but  little  moment,  in  a  column  of  a  few  com- 
panies, would  be  serious  inconveniences  in  a  general  column 
of  many  battalions.  Ilence  tho  instructor  will  give  the  greatest 
care  in  causing  all  the  prescribed  principles  to  be  strictly  ob- 
served. To  this  end,  he  will  hold  himself  on  the  directing 
Dank,  the  better  to  observe  all  the  movements. 

Article  Second. 

Briny  in  column,  lo  break  files  to  (he  ?ear,    and  to   cause   them  t* 
re-enter  into  line. 

289.  The  company  being  in  march,  and  supposed  to  constitute 
a  subdivision  of  a  column,   right    for  left)    in   front,   when  the 

instructor  shall  wish  to  cause  files  to  break  off  he    will  give  tho 
order  to  tho  captain,  who  will  immediately  turn  to  his  company, 
tJ  command  : 

I.   Two  jilts  from  Ufl  (or  right)  to  rear.     9.  March. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY.  8,r, 

i!90.  At  the  command  march,  the  two  files  on  the  left  (or 
right)  of  the  company  will  mark  time,  the  o.hers  will  continue 
to  march  straight  forward  ;  the  two  rear  rank  men  of  these  fries 
will,  as  so:m  as  (he  rear  rank  of  the  company  shail  clear  there, 
move  to  the  right  by  advancing  the  outer  shoulder  ;  the  odd 
number  will  pldce  himself  b  hind  the  third  file  from  that  flank, 
the  even  number  behind  the  fourth,  passing  for  this  purpose  be- 
hind the  odd  number  ;  the  two  front  rank  men  will,  in  like  man- 
ner, move  to  the  right  when  the  rear  rank  of  tho  company  shall 
clear  them,  the  oJd  number  will  place  himself  behind  the  first 
tile,  the  even  number  behind  the  .second  file,  passing  for  this 
purpose  behind  the  odd  number.  If  the  files  are  broken  from 
the  right,  the  men  will  move  to  the  loft,  advancing  the  outer 
►houlder,  the  even  number  of  the  rear  rank  will  p'aee  himself 
behind  the  third  file,  the  odd  number  of  the  sam  :  r^nk  behind 
the  fourth  ;  the  even  number  of  the  froul  rank  behind  the  first 
tile,  the  odd  number  of  the  same  rank  behind  the  secojd,  tin* 
umbers  for  this  purpoej  passing  the  even  numbers.  The 
men  will  be  careful  not  to  lose  their  distances  and  to  keep 
aligned. 

291.  If  the  instructor  should  wish  to  break  two  files  from  tuw 
fame  side,  he  will  give  the  order  to  the  captaiu,  who  will  pro- 
ceed as  ab  >ve  directed. 

292.  At  the  omman  1  march,  given  by  the  captain,  the  files 
already  broken,  advancing  a  little  tlie  outer  shoulder,  will  gaiu 
the  space  of  t»\o  files  to  the  right,  if  the  files  are  broken  from 
the  left,  and  to  the  left,  if  the  files  are  broken  fiora  the  rUn1,. 
shortening,  at  the  same  time,  tho  step,  in  order  t«>  make  room 
between  themselves  and  the  rear  rank  of  the  company  for  the 
files  last  ordered  to  the  rear  ;  the  latter  will  break  by  the  sann- 
commands  and  in  the  same  manner  as  the  first.  The  men  win- 
douJe  should  increase  the  length  of  the  step  in  order  to  prevent 
distances  from  bring  lost. 

29\  Tie  instructor  may  thus  dimiuish  the  front  of  a  com- 
pany by  breaking  off  successive  groups  of  two  files,  but  the 
new  files  must  always  be  broken  from  the  same  side. 

294.  The  instructor,  wishing  to  cause  the  files  broken  off  to 
return  into  line,  will  give  the  order  to  the  captain,  who  will 
immediately  command  : 

1  .    Two  files  utio  line.     2.  Ma^cu. 

29o.  At  the  command  march.,  tho  first  two  files  of  those 
marching  by  the  flank  will  return  briskly  iuto  line,  and  the 
others  will  gain  the  space  of  two  files  by  advancing  the  inner 
choulder  towards  tho  flank  to  which  they  belong 

296.  The  captain  will  turn  to  his  company  to  watch  the  ob- 
servance of  tho  principles  which  have  just  been  prescribed. 

297.  The  instructor   having  caused  groups   of  two  files   u 


66  SCHOOL  OF  TI1K  COMPANY. 

break  one  aftei  another,  and  to  return  again  into  line,  will  after 
wards  cause  two  or  three  groups  to  break  together,  and  for  this 
purpose  will  command  :  1'onr  or  six  files  from  left  (or  right) 
a,  the  rear;  March.  The  files  designated  will  mark  time  ;  each 
rank  will  advance  a  little  the  outer  shoulder  as  soon  as  the  rear 
tank  of  tie  company  shall  clear  it,  will  oblique  at  once,  and 
each  group  will  place  itself  behind  the  four  neighboring  files, 
and  in  the  same  manner,  as  if  the  movement  had  been  executed 
group  by  group,  taking  care  that  the  distances  are  preserved. 

298.  The  instructor  will  nezt  order  the  captain  to  cause  two 
or  three  groups  to  be  brought  into  line  at  once,  who,  turning  to 
the  company,  will  command  : 

Four  or  six  files  into  line — March. 

299.  At  the  command  march,  the  files  designated  will  ad- 
vance the  inner  shoulder,  move  up  and  form  on  the  flank  of 
the  company  by  the  shortest  lines. 

300.  As  often  as  files  shall  break  off  to  the  rear,  the  guide 
on  that  Hank  will  gradually  close  on  the  nearest  front  rani 
man  remaining  in  line,  and  ho  will  also  open  out  to  make 
roi  m  for  files  ordered  into  line. 

301.  The  files  which  march  in  the  rear  arc  disposed  in  the 
following  order  :  the  loft  files  as  if  the  company  was  march 
ing  by  the  right  flank,  and  the  right  files  as  if  the  compan; 
were  marching  by  the  left  flank.  Consequently,  whenevei 
there  is  on  the  right  or  left,  of  a  subdivision,  a  file  which  does 
not  belong  to  a  group,  it  will  be  broken  singly. 

302.  It  is  necessary  to  the  preservation  of  distances  ii 
column  that  the  men  should  be  habituated  in  the  schools  o! 
detail    to    execute    the   movements  of  this  article  with  pre- 
cision. 

303.  If  new  files  broken  off  do  not  step  well  to  the  left  or 
light  in  obliquing  ;  if,  when  files  are  ordered  i,nto  line,  they 
do  not  move  up  with  promptitude  and  precision,  in  eilhei 
case  the  following  files  will  be  arrested  in  their, march,  and 
thereby  cause  the  column  to  be  lengthened  out. 

304.  The  instructor  will  place  himself  on  the  flank  from 
which  the  files  arc  broken,  to  assure  himself  of  the  exact  ob- 
servance of  the  principles. 

S0&,  Files  will  only  be  broken  off  from  the  side  of  direction, 
in  order  that  the  whole  company  may  easily  pass  from  the 
front  to  the  flank  march. 

Article  Third. 

To  march  the  column  id  route,   and  to  execute  the  movements  inci- 
dent thereto. 

.30G.  The  swiftness  of  the  route  step  will  be  one  hundred 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY.  81 

and  ten  steps  in  a  minute  ;  this  swiftness  will  be  habitually 
maintained  in  column  in  route,  when  the  roads  and  ground 
nay  permit. 

307.  The  company  being1  at  a  halt,  and  supposed  to  consti- 
tute a   subdivision   of  a   column,  when  the  instructor  shall 

•  wish  to  cause  it  to  march  in  theroute  step,  he  will  command  ; 

].   Cchmn,fori-  vr'd.     '-!.  Guide,  kft  (or  right.)     3.  Route  stpp. 
4.  March. 

308.  At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  the  captain,  the 
4 wo  ranks  will  step  olf  together  ;  the  rear  rank  will  take, 
in  marching,  by  shortening  a  few  stops,  a  distance  of  one 
pace,   (twenty-eight  inches')  from  the  rank  preceding,  which 

listance  will  be  computed  from  the  breasts  of  the  men  in  the 
rear  rank,  to  the  knapsacks  of  the  men  in  the  front  rank. 
The  men,  without  further  command,  will  immediately  carry 
their  arms  at  will,  as  indicated  in  the  school  of  the  soldier, 
No.  140.  They  will  no  longer  be  required  to  march  in  the 
cadenoe  pace,  or  with  the  same  foot,  or  to  remain  silent. 
The  files  will  march  at  ease  ;  but  care  will  be  taken  to  pre- 
vent tho  ranks  from  intermixing,  the  front  rank  from  getting 
in  advance  of  the  guide,  and  the  rear  rank  from  opening  to 
too  great  a  distance. 

309.  The  company  marching  in  the  route  step,  the  instruc- 
tor will  cause  it  to  change  direction,  which  will  be  executed 
without  formal  commands,  on  a  simple  caution  from  the  cap- 
tain ;  the  rear  rank  will  come  up  to  change  direction  in  the 
same  manner  as  the  front  rank.  Each  rank  will  conform 
itself,  although  in  the  route  step,  to  the  principles  which  have 
been  prescribed  for  the  change  in  closed  ranks,  with  this  dif- 
ference only  :  that  the  pivot  man,  instead  of  taking  steps  of 
nine,  will  take  steps  of  fourteen  inches,  in  order  to  clear  the 
wheeling  point. 

310.  The  company  marching  in  the  route  step,  to  cause  it 
to  pass  to  the  cadenced  step,  the  instructor  will  first  order 
pieces  to  be  brought  to  the  right  shoulder,  and  then  com- 
mand : 

1.  Quick  time.     2.  March. 

311.  At  the  command  march,  the  men  will  resume  the 
cadenced  step,  and  will  close  so  as  to  leave  a  distance  ot 
-ixteen  inches  between  each  rank. 

312.  The  company  marching  in  the  cadenced  pace,  the 
instructor,  to  cause  it  to  take  the  route  step,  will  command  : 

1.  Route  step.     2.  March. 

313.  At  the*  command  march,  the  front  rank  will  continue 
Ahe  step  of  twenty-eight  inches,  the  rear  rank  will  take,  by 


88  SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPAN1 

gradually  shortening  the  step,  the  distance  of  twenty -eight 

inches  from  the  front  rank  :  the  men  will  carry  their  anns  at 
will. 

314.  If  the  company  be  marching  in  the  route  step,  and 
i he  instructor  should  suppose  the  necessity  of  marching  by 
the  flank  in  the  same  direction,  he  will  command  : 

E.   Company  ly  the  right   (or  left )   Hank.     2    By  file  It 
right.)     3.  March. 

315.  At  the  command  march,  the  company  will  face  to  tin 
right  (or  left)  in  marching,  the  captain  will  place  himself  by 

'it:  side  of  the  guide  who  conducts  the  leading  flank .;  this 
xnide  will  wheel  immediately  to  the  left  or  right  ;  all  the 
files  will  come  in  succession  to  wheel  on  the  same  spot  as 
the  guide;  ;  if  there  be  files  broken  off  to  the  rear,  they  will, 
by  wheeling,  regain  their  respective  places,  and  follow  the 
movement  of  the  company. 

31G.  The  instructor,  having  caused  the  company  to  be 
again  formed  into  line,  will  exercise  it  in  increasing  and  di- 
minishing front,  by  platoon,  which  will  be  executed  by  the 
same  commands,  and  the  same  means,  as  il  the  company 
■were  marching  in  the  cadenced  step.  When  the  company 
hreaks  into  platoons,  the  chief  of  each  will  move  to  the  flank, 
of  his  platoon,  and  will  take  the  place  of  the  guide,  who  will 
step  back  into  the  rear  rank. 

311.  The  company  being  in  column,  by  platoon,  and  sup- 
ooscd  to  march  in  the  route  step,  the  instructor  can  cause 
ihe  front  to  be  diminished  and  increased,  by  section,  if  the 
platoons  have  a  front  of  twelve  hies  or  more. 

318.  The  movements  of  diminishing  and  increasing  front, 
by  section,  will  be  executed  according  to  the  principles  indi- 
cated for  the  same  movement  by  platoons.  The  right  sec- 
tions of  platoons  will  be  commanded  by  the  captain  and  first 
lieutenant,  respectively  ;  the  left  sections,  by  the  two  next 
subalterans  in  rank,  or.  in  their  absence,  by  sergeants. 

319.  The  instructor,  wishing  to  diminish  by  section,  will 
give  the  order  to  the  captain,  who  will  command  • 

I.  Break  info  sections.     2:  Mv.rc<n. 

320.  As  soon  as  the  platoons  shall  be  broken,  each  chief 
of  section  will  place  himself  on  its  directing  flank  in  tho 
front  rank;  the  guides  who  will  be  thus  displaced,  will  fall 
back  into  the  rear  rank;  the  file  closer  wiil  close  up  to  within 
one  pace  of  this  rank.  , 

321.  Platoons  will  be  broken  into  sections  only  in  the 
column  in  route,  the  movement  will  never  be  executed  in  tho 


SCHOOL  OF  TUE  COMPANY.  89 

manoeuvres,  whatever  may  be  the  front  of  the  company. 
i,22.  When  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  re-form  platoi  l 
will  give  the  order  to  the  captain,  who  will  command: 

1.  Fcrm  platoons.    2.  March. 

At  the  first  command,  each  chief  ot  section  will  place 
himself  before  its  centre,  and  the  guides  will  pass  into  tie- 
front  rank.  At  the  command  march,  the  movement  will  be 
executed  as  has  been  prescribed  for  forming  company.  The 
moment  the  platoons  are  formed,  the  chiefs  of  the  left  sec- 
tions will  return  to  their  places  as  file  closers. 

3-24.  The  instructor  will  also  cause  to  be  executed  the  di- 
minishing and  increasing  front  by  libs,  as  prescribed  in  the 
pn  cediug  article,  and  in  the  same  manner,  as  if  marching  in 
the  cadenccd  step.  When  the  company  is  broken  into  sec- 
tions, the  subdivisions  must  not  b  r<  duced  to  a  front  of  less 
than  six  files,  not  counting  the  chief  of  the  section. 

r>2u.  The  company  being-  broken  by  pTatqon,  or  by  section. 
tlic  instructor  will  cause  it,  marching  in  the  route  step,  t.« 
march  by  the  flank  in  the  same  direction,  by  tii"  commands 
and  the  means  indicated,  Nos.  314  and  31"'.  The  moment 
the  subdivisions  shall  face  to  the  right  (or  left,)  the  first  file 
of  each  will  wheel  to  the  left  (or  right,)  in  marching,  to  pr  ■- 
kong  the  direction,  and  to  unite  with  the  rear  file  of  the  sub- 
division immediately  preceding.  The  file  elisors  will  take 
their  habitual  places  in  the  march  by  the  flank,  before  the 
union  of  the  subdivisions. 

326.  If  the  company  be  marching-  by  the  right  flank,  and 
the  instructor  should  wish  to  un  iouble  -.  which  might 

sometimes  be  found  necessary,  he  will  inform  the  captain, 
who,  after  causing  thecadenced  step  to  be  resumed,  and  arms 
to  be  shouldered  or  supported,  will  command  : 

1.  //:  two  rants,  undouble  file.     2.  M.\;:cn. 

5*27.  At  the  second  command,  the  odd  numbers  will  con- 
tinue to  march  straight  forward  the  ev<  n  numbers  will  short- 
en the  step,  and  obliquing  to  the  left  will  place  themselves 
promptly  behind  the  odd  numbers;  th  rear  rank  will  gain  a 
step  to  the  left  so  as  to  re-take  the  touch  of  elbows  on  the 
side  of  the  front  rank 

328.  If  the  company  be  marching  by  the  left  flank,  it  will 
be  the  even  numbers  who  will  continue  to  march  forward, 
and  the  odd  numbers  who  will  un  double. 

329.  If  the  instructor  should  wish  to  double  the  files,  he- 
will  give  the  order  to  the  captain,  who  will  command: 

4 

I    fa  famr -ranks,  doubk  jibs,     2   Mabch. 


SCa  OL  (  V  THE  COMPANY. 

830.  ,\t  the  command  mtrch,  the  files  v  111  doable  in  the  man- 
i  i  r  as  explained,  when  the  company  faces  by  thcrightor  the1 
left  flank.     The  instructor  will  afterwards  cause  the  route 

•  :••   resumed. 

The  various  movements  ;  i  in  this  lesson  may 

•  cuted  in  double  quick  time.  Tne  men  v  ill  be  brought, 
by  degrees,  to  pass  ovtjr  at  this  gait  a^out  eleven  hundred 
yards  in  sewn  minutes. 

'  When  the  com|  any  marching  in  the  route  Btep  shall 
halt,  the  rear  rank  will  close  up  at  the  command  halt,  and  the 
whole  will  shoulder  anus 

333.  Marching  in  the  route. step, .the  men. will  be  permitted 
to  cany  their  pieces  in  the  manner  they  shall  find  must  con- 
venieut,  paying  attention  only  to  I*  hi  the  muzzles  up,  so  as 
to  avoid  accidents. 

ARTICLE    POUBXH. 

Countermarch. 

'  334.  The  company  being  at  a  halt,  and  supposed  to  consti- 
tute part  of  a  column,  right  in  front,  when  the  instructor 
Khali  wish  to  cause  it  to  countermarch,  he  will  command  : 

1.   Counter  march.      2.   Company,  right—  Face.     3.  By  file  left. 
4.  March. 

335.  At  the  second  command,  the  company  will  face  to  the 
right,  the  two  guides  to  the  right  about  ;  the  captain  will  go 
to  the  right  of  his  company  and  cause  two  liles  to  break  to 
the  rear,  and  then  place  himself  by  the  side  of  the  front  rank 
man,  to  conduct  him. 

336,  At  the  command  march,  both  guides  will  stand  fast  ; 
the  company  will  step  off  smartly  ;  the  iirst  file,  conducted 
by  the  captain,  v/ill  wheel  around  the  right  guide,  and  direct 
its  march  along  the  front  rank  so  as  to  arrive  behind,  and 
two  paces  from  the  left  guide  ;  each  file  will  come  in  succes- 
sion to  wheel  on  the  same  ground  around  the  right  guide. ; 
the  leading  file  having  arrived  at  a  point  opposite  to  the  left 
guide,  the  captain  will  command  : 

I.   Company.     2.  Halt.     3.  Fiion't.     4.   Right — Dress. 

331.  The  first  command  will  be  given  at/ywr  paces  from 
the  point  where  the  leading  file  is  to  rest. 

338.  At  the  second  command,  the  company  will  halt. 

339.  At  the  third,  it  will  face  to  the  front. 

340.  At  the  fourth,  the  company  will  dress  by  the  right ; 
the  captain  will  step  two  paces  outside  of  the  left  guide,  now 
on  the  right,  and  direct  the  alignment,  so  that  the  front  rank 
may  be  enclosed  between  the  two  guides  ;  the  company  being 


LESSON  VI 


AF.T.y 


V..I  \.\'.1..LLXJ 

rxzrrrnxs 


6 


r  i  i  i  i  i  i-Lu  i 


l    l     l     l    l     I    I    I     I    l~T 


r5    □ 


i  ;   i  i   i-j-i  I  I  ij^i 
i   i    i   i    i    i    I  M   M 


1     I 


ll 


- 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY. 


aligned,  lie  will  command  Front,  and  place  himself  before 
-the  centre  of  the  company  as.  if  in  column  ;  the  guides,  pass- 
ing along  the  front  rank,  will  shift  to  their  proper  places,  ou 
the  right  and  left  ol  that  rank. 

341.  In  a  column,  by  platoon,  the  countermarch  will  be 
executed  by  the  same  commands,  and  according  to  the  saim 
principles  :  the  guide  of  each  platoon  will  face  about,  ami 
its  chief  wit!  place  himself  by  the  side  of  the  file  on  the  right, 
to  conduct  it, 

§42.  In  a  column,  left  in  front,  the  countermarch  will  1» 
executed  by  inverse  commands  and  means,  bill  according  t<: 
the  same  principles.  Thus,  the  movement  will  be  made  by 
the  right; flank  of  subdivisions,  if  the  right  be  in  front,  a&d 
by  the  left  flank,  if  the  left  be  in  front  ;  in  both  cases  tin 
subdivisions  will  wheel  by    Sle  to  the  side  of  the  front  ran1  . 

.Article  Fifth. 

Jjcing  in  column  b>;  platoon,  to  form  on  the  right  (or  left)  ini< 
line  cf  battle. 

343.  The  column  fey  platoon,  .right  in  front,  being  in  march; 
the  instructor,  wishing  to  form  it  on  the  right  into  Hue  of 
battle,  will  command: 

1.   On  the  right  into  line.     2.   Guide  right 

311.  At  the  second  command,  the  guide   of  each  pla 
will  shift  quickly  to  its  right  flank,  and  the  men  will  touch 
elbows   to   the   right  ;   the  column   will   continue  to  march 
straight  forward. 

3-45.  The  instructor  having  given  the  second  command, 
will  move  briskly  to  the  point  at  which  the  right  of  the  com- 
pany ought,  to  rest  in  line,  and  place  I  Iraself  facing  the  point 
of  direction  to  the  left  which  he  will  choose. 

340.  The  line  of  battle  ought  to  be  bo  chosen  that  the  guidi 
of  each  platoon,  after  having  tinned  to  the  right,  may  have, 
at  least,  ten  paces  to  take  before  arriving  upon  that  line. 

347.  The  head  of  the, column  being  nearly  opposite  to  the 
instructor,  the  ►chief  of  the  first  platoon  will  command:  1. 
Right  turn  :.  and  when  exactlv  opposite  to  that  point,  he  will 
add  : 

2.  March. 

348., At  the  command  march,  the  first  platoon  will  turn  to 
the  right,, in  conformity  with  the  principles  prescribed  in  the 
school  of  the  soldier,  No.  333.  Its  guide  will  so  direct  his 
march  as  to  bring  the  front  rank  man,  next  on  his  left,  oppo- 


OF  THK  COMPANY. 


site  to  the   instructor  ;  the  chief  of  the  platoon  will  marc)* 
before  itc  when  its  guide  shall  be  near  the  line 

tli    l  ■_  will  comm 

1.   Platoon.     2.   Hal:. 

340.  At  i."  command  halt,  which  will  be  given  at  the  in- 
Ktant  the  right  of  th  •  platoon  shall  arrive  at  the  distance  of 
three  paces  from  the  line  of  battle,  the  platoon  will  halt  ; 
the  files,  nol  yet  in  line,  will  come  up  promptly.  The  guide 
will  throw-  himself  on  the  line  of  battle,  opposite  to  one  of 
of  the  three  left,  fil»s  of  his  platoon  ;  he  will  face  to  the  in- 
structor, who  will  align  him  on  the  point  of  direction  to  the 
loft.  The  chief  of  platoon  having,  at  the  same  time  gone  to 
the  point  where  right  of  the  company  is  to  rest,  will,  i  a 
>  »on  as  he  set  e  all  the  files  of  the  platoon  in  line,  command  : 

Right — Dri 

3.")0.  At  this  the  first  platoon  will  align  itself;  the  front 
rank  man,  who  fiuds  himself  opposite  to  the  guide,  will  rest 
his  breast  lightly  against  the  right  arm  of  this  guide,  and 
the  chief  of  the  |  latoon,  from  the  right,  will  direct  the  align- 
ment on  this  man. 

351.  The  second  platoon  will  continue  to  inarch  straight 
forward,  until  iis  guide  shall  arrive  opposite  to  the  left  file 
of  the  first  ;  it  will  then  turn  to  the  right  at  the  command  of 
its  chief,  and  march  towards  the  line  of  battle,  its  guide  di- 
recting himself  on  the  left  file  of  the  lirst  platoon. 

35-J.  The  guide  having  arrived  at  the  distance  of  three 
paces  from  the  line  of  battle,  this  platoon  will  be  halted,  as 
prescribed  for  the  first ;  at  the  instant  it  halts,  i t a  guide  will 
spring  on  the  line  of  battle,  opposite  to  one  of  the  three  left 
tiles  of  his  platoon,  and  will  be  assured  in  his  position  by  the 
instructor. 

353.  The  chief  of  the  second  platoon,  seeing  all  its  files  in 
line,  and  ity.  guide  established  on  the  direction,  will  com- 
mand : 

Right  -Dress. 

354".  Having  given  this  command,  he  will  return  to  his- 
place  as  a  file  closer,  passing  around  the  left  ;  the  second 
platoon  will  dress  up  on  the  alignment  of  the  first,  «.*k!  v*  bi-n 
established,  the  captain  will  command  : 

FftOJJT. 

355.  The  movement  ended,  the  instructor  will  command  . 
Qnidts— rPosTS 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY.  5? 


356.  At  this  command,  the  two  guides  will  return  to  their 
places  in  line  of  battle. 

357.  A  column,  by  platoon,  left  in  front,  will  form  on  the 
left  into  line  of  battle,  according  to  the  same  principles,  and, 
by  inverse  means,  applying-  to  the  second  platoon  what  is 
prescribed  for  the  first,  and  reciprocally.  The  chief  of  the 
second  platoon  having'  aligned  it,  from  the  point  of  appui,  (the 
left,)  will  retire  to  his  place  as  a  file  closer.  The  captain 
having  halted  the  first  platoon  three  paces  behind  the  line  of 
battle,  will  go  the  same  point  to  align  {his  platoon,  and  then 
command  :  Front.  At  the  command,  guides— posts,  given  by 
the  instructor,  the  captain  will  shift  to  his  proper  flank,  and 
the  guides  take  their  places  in  the  line  of  battle. 

358.  When  the  companies  of  a  regiment  are  be  exercised, 
at  the  same  time,  in  the  school  of  the  company,  the  colonel 
will  indicate  the  lesson  or  lessons  they  are  severally  to  exe- 
cute. The  whole  will  commence  by  a  bugle  signal,  and  ter- 
minate in  like  manner. 

Formation  of  a  company  from  two  ranks   into  single  rank,   ami 

reciprocally. 

359.  The  company  being  formed  into  two  ranks  in  th  • 
manner  indicated  No  8,  school  of  the  soldier,  and  supposed 
to  make  part  of  a  column,  right  or  left  in  front,  w'.ien  the  in- 
structor shall  wish  to  form  into  single  rank,  he  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  In  one  rani',  form  company.     2.  Marck. 

300.  At  the  first  command,  the  right  guide  will  face  to 
the  right. 

361.  At  the  command  march,  the  right  guide  will  step  ofl" 
and  march  in  the  prolongation  of  the  front  rank. 

3G2.  The  first  file  will  step  off  at  the  same  time  with  the 
guide  ;  the  front  rank  man  will  turn  to  the  right  at  the  first 
step,  follow  the  guide,  and  be  himself  followed  by  the  rear 
rank  man  of  his  file,  who  will  come  to  turn  on  the  same  spot 
where  he  had  turned.  The  second  file,  and  successively  all 
the  other  files,  will  step  off  as  has  been  prescribed  for  tbe 
first,  the  front  rank  man  of  each  file  following  immediately 
the  rear  rank  man  of  the  file  next  on  his  right.  The  captain 
will  superintend  the  movement,  and  when  the  last  man  shall 
have  stepped  off,  he  will  halt  the  company,  aud  face  it  to  the 
i'ront. 

363.  The  file  closers  will  take  their  places  in  line  of  battle, 
two  paces  in  rear  of  the  rank. 

364.  The  company  being  in  single  rank,  when  the  instruc- 
tor shall  wish  to  form  it  into  two  ranks,  ho  will  command  : 


:u  SCHOOL  or  Tin-:  comtaxy. 

1    In  /'"  i  ranks,  form  company,      2.  Company  right — Face* 
3.  March. 

At  the  second  command,  tlif  company  will  face  to  tl.e 
right  :  the  right  guide  and  the  man  on  the  right  will  remain 
faced  to  tl.t:  front. 

306.  At  the  command  marcn,  the  men  who  have  faced  to 
the  right,  will  step  off,  and  form  files  in* the  following  man- 
ner :  the  second  man  in  the  rank  will  place  himself  behind 
the  first  to  form  the  first  file  ;  the  third  will  place  himself  by 
•he  side  of  the  first  in  the  front  rank  ;  the  fourth  .behind  the 
third  in  the  rear  rank.  All  the  others  will,  in  like  manner, 
themselves,  alternately;  in  the  front  and  rear  rank,  and 
will  thus  form  iiles  of  two  men,  on  the  left  of  those  already 
formed. 

o67.  The  formations  above  described  will  be  habitually  ex 
ecuted  by  the  right  of  companies  ;  but  when  the  iu'st-ructo 
shall  wish  to  have  them  executed  by  the  left,  he  will  face  the 
company  about,  and  post  the  guides  in  the  rear  rank. 

368.  The  formation  will  then  be  executed  by  the  same  com- 
mands, and  according'  to  the  same  principles  as  by  the  front 
rank  :  the  movement  commencing-  with  the  left  file,  now  be- 
come the  right,  and  in  each  rile  by  the  rear  rank  man,  now 
become  the  front  ;  the  left  Liiide  will  conform  to  what  has 
been  prescribed  for  the  right. 

369.  The  formation  ended,  the  instructor  will  face  the  com- 
pany to  its  proper  front. 

370.  When  a  battalion  in  line  has  to  execute  cither  of  the 
formations  above  described,  the  colonel  will  cause  it  to  break 
to  the:  rear  by  the  right  or  left  of  companies,  and  will  then 
give  the  commands  just  prescribed  for  the  instructor.  Each 
company  will  execute  the  movement  as  if  acting  singly. 

Formation  of  a  company  from  two  ranis  into  four,  and  recipro- 
cally, at  a  halt,  and  in  march. 

371.  The  company  being  formed  in  two  ranks,  at  a  halt, 
and  supposed  to  form  a  part  of  a  column  right  in  front,  when 
the  instructor  shall  wish  to  form  it  into  four  ranks,  he  will 
command  : 

].  hi   four  ranks,  form   company.      2.     Company   left — Face 
3.  March  (or  double  quick — March.) 

372.  At  the  second  command,  the  left  guide  will  remain 
faced  to  the  front,  the  company  will  face  to  the  left :  the  rear 
vauk  will  gain  the    distance   of  one   pace  from   the  front 


school  of  the  compaxt.  s: 


rank  by  a  side  step  to  the  left  and  rear,  and  the  men  will  form 
into  four  ranks  as  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier. 

373.  At  the  command  march,  the  first  file  of  fonr  men  will 
refacc  to  the  iron;  without  nudoubling.  All  the  other  files  of 
four  will  step  off*,  and  closing  successively  to  about  five 
inches  of  the  preceding  file,  will  halt,  and  immediately  face  to 
the  front,  the  men  remaining  doubled. 

314.  The  file  closers  will  take  their  new  places  in  line  of 
battle,  at  two  prices  in  rear  of  the  fourth  rank. 

315.  The  captain  will  superintend  the  movement. 

376.  The  company  being  in  four  ranks,  when  the1  instructor 
shall  wish  to  form  it  into  two  ranks,  he  will  command  : 

3.    In   two  ranks,  form  company.     2.    Company  right — Pace 
3.  March  (or  double  quid- — March.) 

377.  At  the  second  command  the  left  guide  will  stand  fast, 
the  company  will  face  t<>  Ine  right. 

378.  At  the  command  marvh,  the  right  guide  will  step  off 
and  march  in  the  prolongation  of  the  front  rank.  T*>e  leading 
file  of  four  men  will  step  off  at  the  same  time;  the  other  files 
standing  fast  ;  the  second  tile  will  step  off  when  there  shall 
be  between  it  and  the  first  space  sufficient  to  form  into  two 
ranks.  The  following  files  will  execute  successively  what 
has  been  prescribed  for  the  second.  As  Boon  as  the  last  tile 
shall  have  its  distance,  the  instructor  will  command  : 

1.   Company.     2.  Halt.     3.  Front. 

37t.  At  the  command  front,  the  company  will  face  to  the 
front,  and  the  files  will  undouble. 

380.  The  company  being  formed  in  two  ranks,  and  march- 
ing to  the  front,  when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  form  it  into 
four  ranks,  he  will  command  : 

1.  In  four  ranks,  form  company.     2.  By  the  left,  double Jiles 

o.  March  (or  double  quick — March.) 

381.  At  the  command  march,  tie  left  guide  and  the  left 
file  of  the  company  will  continue  to  m%rch  straight  to  the 
front  :  the  company  will  make  a  half  face  to  the  left,  the  odd 
numbers  placing  themselves  behind  the  even  numbers.  The 
even  numbers  of  the  rear  rank  will  shorten  their  steps  a  lit- 
tle to  permit  the  odd  numbers  of  the  front  rank  to  get  be- 
tween them  and  the  even  numbers  of  that  rank.  The  files 
thus  formed  of  ionrs,  except  the  left  file,  will  continue  to 
march  obliquely,  lengthening-  their  steps  slightly,  so  as  to 
keep  constantly  abreast  of  the  guide;  each  file  will  close  sue- 


56  S.'iiOOL  OF  THE  COMIWN  i 


ccssively  on  the  file  next  <m  its  left,  and  when  at  the  pi 
distance;  from  tliat  file,  will  face  to  the  front  by  a  hall'  f^        i 
the  right,  and  take  the  touch  of  elbows  to  the  left. 

The   company  being  in  march   to  the   front  in   (our 
ranks,  when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  form  it  in  two  :. 
he  will  command  : 

J     In  fuv  ranks,  form  company.     2.  By  the  right,  wndoubU 
I?.  March  (or  double  quid: — Mar< 

383.  At  the  command  inarch,  the  left  guide  and  the  left  file 
of  the  company  will  continue  to  march  straight  to  the  front ; 
the  company  will  mala1  a  half  face  to  the  right  and  march 
obliquely,  lengthening  the  step  a  little,  in  ord<  r  to  keep,  as 
near  as  possil  le,  abreast  of  the  guide.  As  soon  as  the  seconfl 
tile  from  the  left  shall  have  gained  to  the  right  the  interval 
necessary  for  the  left  file  to  form  into  two  ranks,  the  second 
tile  will  face  to  the  front  by  a  half  face  to  the  left  and  march 
straight  forward  ;  the  left  tile  will  immediately  form  into  two 
ranks,  and  take  the  touch  of  elbows  to  the  left.  Each  file 
will  execute  successively,  what  has  just  been  prescribed  for 
the  tile  next  to  the  left,  and  each  file  will  form  into  two  ranks* 
when  the  file  next  on  its  right  has  obliqued  the  required  dis- 
tance and  faced  to  the  front. 

334.  If  the  company  he  supposed  to  make  part  of  a  colurn.i. 
left  in  front,  these  different  movements  will  be  executed  ac- 
cording to  the  same  principles  and  by  inverse  means,  substi- 
tuting the  indication  left  for  right. 


iN'D  ok  Tin;  senooi.  ok  we  compact. 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOE  SKIRMISHERS. 


General  Principles  and  Division  of  the  Instruction. 

1.  The  movements  of  Skirmishers  should  be  subjected  to  such 

rules  as  will  give  to  the  commander  the  means  of  moving  them  in 
any  direction  with  the  greatest  promptitude, 

2.  It  is  not  expected  that  these  movements  should  be  executed 
with  the  same  precision  as  in  closed  ranks,  nor  is  it  desirable  as 
such  exactness  would  interfere  with  then' prompt  execution. 

3.  When  Skirmishers  are  thrown  out  to  clear  the  way  for,  and 
to  protect  the  advance  of,  the  main  corps,  their  movements  musl 
he  so  regulated  by  this  corps,  as  to  keep  it  constantly  covered 

4.  Every  body  of  Skirmishers  should  have  a  reserve,  the 
strength  of  which  will  vary  according  to  circumstances. 

5.  If  the  body  thrown  out  be  within  sustaining  distance  of  the 
main  corps,  a  small  reserve  will  be  sufficient  for  each  company, 
whose  duty  it  shall  be  to  fill  vacant  places,  furnish  the  line  with 
cartridges,  relieve  the  fatigued,  and  serve  as  rallying  points. 

6.  If  the  main  corps  heat  a  considerable  distance,  besides  the 
company  reserves,  another  reserve  will  be  required,  composed 
of  entire  companies,  which  will  sustain  and  reinforce  such  parts 
of  the  line  as  may  be  attacked:  this  reserve  should  be  strong 
enough  to  relieve  half  the  companies  deployed  as  skirmishers. 

7.  The  reserves  should  be  placed  behind  the  centre  of  the  line 
of  skirmishers,  the  company  reserves  at  150,  and  the  principal 
reserve  at  400  paces.  This,  rule,  however,  is  not  invariable. — 
The  reserves,  while  holding  themselves  within  sustaining  distance 
of  the  line,  should  be,  as  much  as  possible,  in  position  to  afford 
each  other  mutual  protection,  and  must  carefully  profit  by  any 
accidents  of  the  ground  to  conceal  themselves  from  the  view  of 
the  enemy  and  to  shelter  themselves  from  his  ti;v. 

8.  The  movements  of  Skirmishers  will  be  executed  in  quick, 
or  double  quick  time.  The  run  will  be  resorted  to  only  in  cases 
of  urgent  necessity. 

9.  Skirmishers  will  be  permitted  to  carry  their  piece?  in  the. 
manner  most  convenient  to  them. 

10.  The  movements  will  be  habitually  indicated  by  the  sounds 
of  the  bugle. 

11.  The  officers  and  non-commissioned  officers  will  repeat, 
and    couse    the    commands   to   be   executed,  <is   soon    as   thev 

13 


98  INSTRUCTIONS  FOB  SKIRMISHERS. 

are  give::  ;  bat  to  avoid  mi  D  the  signals  arc  employed  they  will 

wait  until   the  last  bugle  Dote  is  sounded  before  commencing  the  movement. 

12.  When  Bkirmishers  are  ordered  t.j  m  tve  rapidly,  the  i  I  non- 
oommlsioaed  officers  will  see  that  the  mencconomi'-  •  their  treogtb,  keep  cool, 
and  proQt  by  all  the  advantages  which  the  ground  may  offer  lor  cover.  It  is 
only  by  this  continual  watchfulness  on  the  part  of  all  gra  1  -.  that  a  line  of 
Bkirmisbere  can  attain 

13.  This  i  will  ho  divided  into  five  articles,  and  subdivided  as 

follow-  : 

ARTICLE  FIRST.  ARTICLE  FOURTH. 

1.  To  deploy  forward.  1.  The  rally. 

2.  To  deploy  by  the  flank.  'J.  To  form  column  to  march  iu  any 

3.  To  extend  interval.-.  direction. 

i.  To  close  intervals.  3.  The  asseuiblv. 


ARTICLE  FIFTH. 


5.  To  relieve  skirmishers. 

ARTICLE  SECOND. 

1.  lo  deploy  a  battalion   as 

1.  Tv»  advance  in  line.  mishers. 

2.  To  retreat  inline.  2.  To  rally  the  battalion  deployed 

3.  To  change  direction.  as  skirmish*  re. 
•1.  To  march  by  the  flank. 

ARTICLE  THIRD. 

1.  To  fire  at  a  halt. 

2.  To  fire  marching. 

11.  In  the  first  four  articles,  it  is  supposed  that  the  movements  are  exe- 
cuted by  a  company  deployed  as  skirmishers,  on  a  front  equal  to  that  of  the 
battalion  in  order  ot  battle.  In  the  fifth  article,  it  is  supposed  that  each- 
company  of  the  battalion,  being  deployed  as  skirmishers,  occupies  a  front  ot 
one  hundred  pices.  From  .'hose  two  examples,  rules  may  be  deduced  for 
3ll  cases,  whatever  may  be  the  numerical  strength  ot  the  skirmisher-,  and 
the  extent  of  ground  they  ought  to  occupy. 

ARTICLE   FIRST. 

DEPLOYMENTS. 

15.  A  company  may  be  deployed  an  skirmishers  4a  two  ways:  forward, 
and  by  the  flank. 

1(5.  The  deployment  forward  will  be  adopted  when  the  company  is  behind 
the  line  on  which  it  is  to  be  established  as  skirmishers  :  it  will  be  deployed 
by  the  Bank,  when  it  finds  itself  already  on  that  line. 

17.  Whenever  a  company  is  to  be  deployed  as  skirmishers,  it  will  be 
divided  into  two  platoons,  and  each  platoon  will  be  subdivided  into  two 
sections  ;  the  comrades  in  battle,  forming  groups  of  four  men,  will  be  careful 
to  know  audio  sustain  each  other.  The  captain  will  assure  himself  that 
the  tiles  iu  the  centre  of  each  platoon  and  sectiou  are  designated. 

18.  A  company  may  be  deployed  as  skirmishers  on  its  right,  left,  or  cen- 
tre tile,  or  on  any  other  named  file  whatsoever.  In  this  manner,  skirmishers 
may  be  thrown  forward  with  the  greatest  possible  rapidity  on  any  ground 
they  may  be  required  to  occupy. 

19.  A  "chain  of  skirmishers  ought  generally  to  preserve  their  alignment, 
but  no  advantages  which  the  ground  may  present  should  be  sacrificed  to 
attain  this  regularity. 

20.  The  interval  between  skirmishers  depends  on  the  extent  of  ground  to 
l:e  covered;   but  in  general,  it  is  not  proper  that  the  groups  of  four  men 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  SKIRMISHERS.  99 

should  be  removed  more  tbau  forty  paces  from  each  other.  The  habitual 
distance  between  men  of  the  same  group  in  open  grounds  will  be  five  paces  ;  in 
no  case  will  they  lose  sight  of  each  other. 

21.  The  frout  to  be  occupied  to  cover  a  battalion  comprehends  its  front 
and  the  halt  of  each  interval  which  separates  it  from  the  battalion  on  its  right 
and  left.  If  a  line,  who?c  wings  are  not  supported,  should  be  covered  by 
skirmishers,  it  will  be  necessary  either  to  protect  the  Hanks  with  skirmishers, 
or  to  extend  them  in  front  of  the  line  so  far  beyond  the  wings  as  effectually 
to  oppose  any  atlemp1  irmishers  to 
disturb  the  HaDks. 

To    Deflot    Forward. 

22.  A  company  being  at  a  halt  or  in  march,  when  i.  I  wish 
to  deploy  it  forward  on  the  left  file  of  the  first  platoon,  holding  the  second 
platoon  in  reserve,  he  will  command: 


1.  Iirst  platoon — as  skirmishers. 

2.  On  the  left  file — take  intervals. 

:>.  -March  (or  double,  rp/ick — March.) 


23.  At  the  first  command,  the  second  and  third  lieutenants  will  place 
themselves  rapidly  two  paces  behind  the  centres  of  the  right  and  left  sections 
of  the  first  platoon  ;  the  fifth  sergeant  will  move  one  pace  in  front  of  the  cen- 
tre of  the  first  platoon,  and  will  place  himself  between  the  two  sections  in  the 
front  rank  as  soon  as  the  movement  begins  ;  the  fourth  sergeant  will  place 
himself  on  the  left  of  the  front  rank  of  "the  same  platoon,  as  soon  as  he  can 
pass.  The  captain  will  indicate  to  this  sergeant  the  poiut  on  which  be  wishes 
him  to  direct  his  march.  The  first  lieutenant,  placing  himself  before  the 
centre  of  the  second  platoon,  will  command  : 

Seco?id  platoon  baekwafd— March. 

24.  At  this  command,  the  second  platoon  will  step  three  paces  to  the  rear, 
so  as  to  unmask  the  flaukof  the  first  platoon.  It  will  then  be  halted  by  it*? 
chief,  and  the  second  sergeant  will  place  himself  on  the  left,  and  the  third 
sergeant  on  the  right  flank  of  this  platoon. 

25  At  the  command  march,  the  left  group  of  four  men,  conducted  by  the 
fourth  sergeant,  will  direct  itself  on  the  point  indicated  ;  all  the  other  groups 
of  fours  throwing  forward  briskly  the  left  shoulder,  will  move  diagonally  to 
the  front  in  double  quick  time,  so  as  to  gain  to  the  right  the  space  of  twenty 
paces,  which  shall  be  the  distance  between  each  group  and  that  immediately 
on  its  left.  When  the  second  group  from  the  left  shall  arrive  on  a  line  with 
and  twenty  paces  from  the  first,  it  will  march  straight  to  the  front,  conform- 
ing to  the  gait  and  direction  of  the  first,  keeping  constantly  on  the  same 
alignment  and  at  twenty  paces  from  it.  The  third  group,  and  all  the  others 
will  conform  to  what  has  just  been  prescribed  for  the  second  ;  they  will  arrive 
successively  on  the  line.    The  right  guide  will  arrive  with  the  last  group. 

26.  The  left  guide  having  reached  the  point  where  the  left  of  the  line 
should  rest,  the  captain  will  command  the  skirmishers  to  halt ;  the  men 
composing  each  group  of  fours  will  then  immediately  deploy  at  five  paces 
from  each  other,  and  to  ^e  right  and  left  of  the  front  rank  man  or  the  ever^ 
file  iu  each  group,  the  rew  rank  men  placing  themselves  on  the  left  of  their 
file  leaders.  If  any  groups  be  not  in  line  at  the  command  halt,  they  will 
move  up  rapidly,  conforming  to  what  has  just  been  described. 

27.  If.  during  the  deployment,  the  line  should  be  fired  upon  by  the  enemy, 
the  captain  may  cause  the  groups  of  fours  to  deploy,  as  they  gain  their 
proper  distances. 

28.  The  line  being  foimed,  the  nou-commissioned  officers  on  the  right,  left 
and  centre  of  the  platoon  will  place  themselves  ten  paces  in  rear  of  the  line, 


100  [NSTRUCTIONS  FOR  SKIRMISHERS.     • 

iiu<l  opposite  the  positions  they  respectively  occupied.    The  chiefs  of  sections 
will  promptly  rectify  any  irregularities/and  then  place  themselves  twenty* 

lire  or  thirty  paces  i.i  rear  of  the  centre  of  their  sections,  each  baring  frith 
him  four  men  taken  Prom  the  reserve,  and  rbo  will  repeal  if 

necessary,  tin-  Bfgoala  sounded  by  the  captain. 

29.  Skirmishers   should  \y   particularly  instructed   to  take  advantaj 

any  cover  which  the  ground  may   offer,  and  should  lie    tlat  on  the  ground 
whenever  such  a  movement  is  necessary  to  protect  them  from  the  fire  of  the 
enemy.      Regularity    in   the   alignment    should    yield    to    this    imp 
advantage. 

30.  When  the  movement  begins,  the  lir.-t  lieutenant  will  fad'  the  second 
in  about,  and  march  it    promptly,  and  by  the  shortest  line,  to  about  oue 

hundred  and  fifty   paces  in  rear  of  the  centre  of  the   line.     He  will   hold 
always  at  this  distauce.  unless  ordered  to  the  contrary. 

31.  The  reserve  win  conform  itself  to  all  the  movements  of  the  line. 
This  ruU  is  general. 

32.  Light  troops  will  carry  their  bayonets  habitually  iu  the  scabbard,  and 
this  rule  applies  equally  to  the  skirmishers  and  the  reserve  ;  whenever 
bayonets  are  required  to  be  fixed,  a  particular  signal  will  be  given.  The 
captain  will  give  a  general  superintendence  to  the  whole  deployment,  and 
then  promptly  place  himself  about  eighty  paces  i;i  rear  of  the  centre  of  the 
line.     He  will  have  with  him  a  bugler  and  four  men  taken  from  the  r^.Tvc. 

33.  The  deploym?nt  may  be  mi  tie  on  the  right  or  the  centre  of  the  platoon, 
by  thee  tm  :  commands,  substituting  th  i  indication  right  or  centre,  for  thai  ol 

He. 
31.  The  deptoymenl  on  the  right  or  the  centre  will  be  made  according  to  th 
principles  prescribed   above  ;  in  this   latter  case,  the  centre  of  the  platoon 
will  be  marked  by  the  right   group  of  fours  in  the  second  section  ;  the  fifth 
sergeant  will  place  himself  on  the  right  of  this  group,  and  serve  as  the  guide 
of  the  platoon  during  the  deploym 

35.  In  whatever  manner  the  deployment  be  made,  'on  the  right,  left,  or 
centre,  the  men  in  each  group  of  fours  will  always  deploy  at  five  paces  from 
each  other,  and  upon  the  front  rank  man  of  the  even  numbered  file.  The 
deployments  will  habitually  be  made  al  twenty  paces  interval  :  bui  if  a 
greater  interval  be  required,  it  will  be  indicated  in  the  command. 

36.  If  a  company  be  thrown  out  as  skirmishers,  so  near  the  main  body  as 
to  render  a  reserve  unnecessary,  the  entire  company  will  be  extended  in  the 
same  manner,  and  according  to  the  same  principles,  as  for  the  deployment  of 
a  platoon.  In  this  case  the  third  lieutenant  will  command  the  I'otKtu  section. 
and  a  non-commissioned  off]  er  designated  for  tbatfurpo:  ondsection; 
the  fifth  sergeant  will  acl  as  centre  guide  :  the  tile  closers  will  place  themselves 
ten  paces  in  rear  of  the  line,  and  opposite  their  places  in  a  line  of  battle. 
The  first  and  second  lieutenant  will  eaeb  have  a  bngler  near  him. 

ro   DEPLOY    BY    I  I 

37.  The  company  being  at  a  halt,  when  the  captain  shall  wish  to  deploy  it 
by  the  flank,  holding  the  first  platoon  in  reserve,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Second  platoon — as  skirmishers.    '2.  By  the  right  flank— take  intervals.     '.',.  March 
(or  (l)itfile  quick  Makch.)a 

38.  At  the  first  command,  the  first  and  third  lieutenants  will  place  them- 
selves respectively,  two  paces  behind  the  centres  of  the  first,  and  second 
-ections  of  the  second  platoon  ;  the  filth  sergeant  will  place  himself  one  pace 
in  front  of  the  centre  of  the  Becond  platoon  :  the  third  sergeant,  as  soon  as 
he  can  pass,  will  place  himself  on  the  right  of  th  :  front  rank  of  the  same 
platoon.  The  captain  will  indicate  to  him  the  point,  on  which  he  wishes  him 
to  direct  his  march.     The  chief  of  the  first  platoon  will  execute  what  has 


S.37 

» , 

0 

• 

y 

i 

:ir: 

1 

■  •■■ 

1 
1 

3 

B    T   1    I 
I 

ggn  b  s  B  li  n  1  IB  ■  B 
* 

■ 

X 

■■ 
■  III 

I     |     | 

tu  an 

OB 

ID 

V              ■ 

■       0 

INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  SKIRMISHERS.  101 

been  prescribed  for  the  chief  of  the  second  plal  ~:i  and  24.    The 

fourth  sergeunt  will  place  himself  on  tb-  Iri t  flank  of  Die  reserve,  the  first 
sergeant  will  remain  on  the  right  flank. 

39.  At  the  second  command,  the  firsl  and  third  lieutenants  will  place 
themselves  two  paces  behind  the  left  croup  of  tbeif  respective  sections. 

40.  At  the  command  march,  the  second  platoon  will  faoe  to  the  right,  and 
commence  the  movement  ;  the  left  group  of  fours  will  stand  last,  but  will 
deploy  as  soon  us  there  is  room  on  its  right,  conforming  to  what  boa  been 
prescribed  No.  26 ;  the  third  Bergeanl  will  place  himeelf  on  the  let;: 
right  group,  to  conduct  it :  the  second  group  will  halt  at  twenty  paces  from 
the  one  on  its  left,  the  third  group  at  twenty  paces  from  the  Becond,and  so  on 
to  the  right.  As  the  groups  halt,  they  will  nt  ;e  to  the  enemy,  and  deploy  as 
has  been  explained  for  the  left  gioup. 

41.  The  chiefs  of  sections  will  pay  particular  attention  to  the  Buc< 
deployments  of  the  groups,  keeping  near  the  group  about  to  bait,  so  as  to 
rectify  any  errors  which  may  be  committed.  Wh  ■  loyment  is 
completed,  they  will  place  themselves  thirty  ;  ■  -  In  rear  of  the  centre  of 
their  -  i  heretofor  i.  The  non-commiBsfoaed 
officers  will  also  pl-nce  themselves  as  previously  indicated. 

42.  A-  soon  as  the  movement  commences,  the  chief  of  tl  "..toon, 
causing  it  to  face  about,  will  move  it  as  indicated  No.  30. 

43.  The  deployment  may  be  made  by  the  left  flank  according  to  the  same 
principles,  substituting  left  flank  for  rightflank. 

44.  If  the  captain  should  wish  to  d<  ■  centre  of 
one  of  the  platoons,  he  will  command  : 

).  Second  platoon— as  skijrmishert.     2.  By  the  right  and  left  flanks— lake  intervals. 

3.  March  (or  double:  quick — Makch.) 

4o.  At  the  firsl  command,  the  officers  and  non-comm  -  rs  will 

conform  to  what  has  been  prescribed  No.  38. 
46.  At  th  "Tupjand,  the  first  lieutenant  will  place  himself  behind 

the  left  group  n;  ;ho  right  section  of  the  second  platoon,  the  third  lieutenant 
behind  the  right  group  of  the  left  section  of  the  same  platoon. 

•17.  At  the  command  march,  the  right  section  will  face  to  the  right,  the  left 
section  will  face  to  the  left,  the  group  on  the  right  of  this  latter  spction  will 
standfast.  The  two  sections  will  move  oft' in  opposite  directions  :  the  third 
sergeant  will  place  himself  on  the  left  of  the  right  file  to  conduct  it,  the 
second  sergeant  on  ths  right  of  the  left  file.  The  t\vo  groups  nearest  thai 
which  stands  fast,  will  each  bait  at  twenty  paces  from  this  group,  and  each  of  the 
other  groups  will  halt  at  twenty  paces  from  the  group  which  is  ia  rear  of  it. 
Each  groiip  will  deploy  as  heretofore  prescrib  .1  No.  40. 

48.  The  first  and  third  lieutenants  will  direct  t::  nt,  holding 
themselves  always  abreast  of  the  g'-oup  which  is  about  to  halt. 

49.  The  captain  can  cause  the  deployment  to  be  made  on  any  named  group 
whatsoever;  in  this  case,  the  fifth  sergeant  will  place  himself  before  the  group 
indicated,  and  the  deployment  will  be  made  according  to  the  principles  here- 
tofore prescrib  ■'.. 

50.  The  entire  company  may  be  e:  to  the  same 
principles. 

10   EXTEND   INTERVALS. 

51.  This  movement,  which  is  employed  to  extend  a  line  of  skirmishi  rs,  will 

be  executed  according  to  the  principles  prescribed  for  deployments. 

52.  If  it  be  supposed  that  the  line  of  skirmishers  is  at  a  bait,  and  that  the 
captain  wishes  to  extend  it  to  the  left,  he  will  command  : 

1.  By  the  left  flank,  (so  many  paces)  extend  intervals.     2.  Makch  (or  double  quick 

—March.) 

53.  At  the  command  March,  the  group  on  the  right  will  stand  fast,  all  the 


102  INSTRUCTIONS  FOB  SKIRMISHERS. 

other  group?  will  face  to  the  left,  and  each  group  will  extend  it--  interval  to 
the  prescribed  distance  by  the  means  indicated  No.  10. 

54.  The  men  of  the  same  group  will  coutiuue  to  f  a  each 
other  the  distance  ot  live  paces,  nnlesa  the  nature  of  the  ground  should  render 
it  necessary  that  they  should  clo.se  nearer,  in  order  to  keep  in  6ight  of  each 
other.  The  intervals  refer  lo  the  .-paces  between  the  groups,  and  not  to  the 
distances  between  the  men  in  each  group.  The  intervals  will  be  taken  from 
the  right  or  left  man   of  the  neighboring  group. 

55.  If  the  line  of  skirmishers  be  marching  to  the  front,  and  the  captain 
fthould  wish  to  extern!  it  to  the  right,  he  will  command  : 

1.  On  the  left  group,  {to  many  paces)  extend  inter  cult.    'J.  March  (or  double  quick 

—March.) 

56.  The  lelt  group,  conducted  by  the  guide,  will  contiuue  to  march  on  the 
poiut  of  diit-ction  ;  the  other  groups  throwing  forward  the  left  shoulder,  and 
taking  the  double  quick  step,  will  open  their  intervals  to  the  prescribed 
distance,  by  the  means  indicated  No.  25,  conforming  also  to  what  is  prescribed 
No.  54. 

57.  Intervals  may  be  extended  on  the  centre  of  the  line,  according  to  the 
same  principles. 

58.  If,  in  extending  intervals,  it  be  intended  that  one  company  or  platoon 
fchould  occupy  a  line  which  had  been  previously  occupied  by  two,  the  men 
of  the  compauy  or  piatoon  which  is  to  retire,  will  fall  successively  to  the  rear 
as  they  are  relieved  by  the  extension  of  the  intervals. 

To  Close  Intervals,. 

59.  This  movement,  lite  that  of  opening  intervals,  will  be  executed 
according  to  the  principles  prescribed  for  the  deployments. 

60.  If  the  line  of  skirmishers  be  halted,  and  the  captain  should  wish  to 
close  intervals  to  the  left,  ho  will  command  : 

1.  By  (he  left  flank  (so  many  paces)  close  interval*.     2.  March  (or  double  quick 

March). 

01.  At  the  command  Marcii,  the  left  group  will  stand  fast,  the  other 
groups  will  face  to  the  left  and  close  to  the  prescribed  distance,  each  group 
facing  to  the  enemy  as  it  attains  its  proper  distance. 

62.  If  the  line  be  marching  to  the  front,  the  captain  will  command  : 

1.  On   the  hf t  grmij  •  )  close  intervals.    March   (or  double  quick — 

March.) 

03.  The  left  group,  conducted  by  the  guide,  will  continue  to  move  on  in  the 
direction  previously  indicated  ;  the  other  groups.advancingthe  right  shoulder, 
will  close  to  the  left,  until  the  intervals  are  reduced  to  the  prescribed  distance. 

64.  Intervals  may  be  closed  on  the  right,  or  on  the  centre,  according  to  the 
uame  principles. 

65.  When  intervals  are  to  be  closed  up,  in  older  to  reinforce  a  line  of 
skirmishers,  so  as  to  cause  two  companies  to  cover  the  ground  which  bad 
been  previously  occupied  by  one,  the  new  company  will  deploy  so  as  to  fiuish 
its  movement  at  twenty  paces  in  rear  of  the  line  it  is  to  occupy,  and  the  men 
will  successively  move  upon  that  line,  as  they  shall  be  unmasked  by  the  men 
of  the  old  company.  The  reserves  of  the  two  companies  will  unite  behind 
the  centre  of  the  line. 

To  Relieve  a  Company  Deployed  as  Skirmishers. 

66.  When  a  company  of  skirmishers  is  to  be  relieved,  the  captain  will  be 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  SKIRMISHERS.  103 

advised  of  the  intention,  which  lie  will   immediately  communicate  to  his  first 
and  second  lieutenant?. 

67.  The  new  company  will  execute  its  deployment  forward,  so  as  to  fini-h 
the  movement  at  about  twenty  paces  in  rear  of  the  line. 

68.  Arrived  at  this  distance,  the  men  of  the  new  company,  by  command  of 
their  captain,  will  advance  rapidly  a  few  pace?  beyond  the  old  line  and  halt  ; 
the  new  Hue  being  established,  the  old  company  will  assemble  on  its  reserve, 
taking  care  not  to  get  into  groups  of  fours  until  they  are  beyond  the  fire  of 
the  enemy. 

69.  If  the  skirmishers  to  be  relieved  are  marching  in  retreat,  the  company 
thrown  out  to  relieve  them  will  deploy  by  the  flack,  as  prescribed  No.  38  and 
following.  The  old  skirmishers  will  continue  to  retire  with  order,  and  having 
passed  the  new  line,  they  will  form  upon  the  rev 

ARTICLE  SECI 

TO    ADVANCE. 

To  advance  in  line,  ami  to  re'reat  in  line. 

70.  When  a  platoon  or  a  company  deployed  as  skirmishers  is  marching  by 
the  front,  the  guide  will  be  habitually  in  the  centre.  No  particular  indication 
to  this  effect  need  be  given  in  the  commands,  but  if,  on  the  contrary,  it  bf> 
intended  that  the  directing  guide  should  be  on  the  right,  or  left,  the  command 
guide  right,  or  guide  left,  will  be  given  immediately  alter  that  of  forward. 

71.  The  captain,  wishing  the  line  of  skirmishers  to  advance,  will  command  : 

1.  Forward.    2.  March  [or  double  quick — Mabch.] 

72.  This  command  will  be  repeated  with  the  greatest  rapidity  by  the  chiefs 
of  sections,  and  in  case  of  need,  by  the  sergeants.  This  rule  i-  general, 
whether  the  skirmishers  march  by  the  front  or  by  the  flan'*. 

73.  At  the  first  command,  three  sergeants  will  move  briskly  on  the  line,  tb*' 
first  on  the  right,  the  second  on  the  left,  and  the  third  in  the  centre. 

74.  At  the  command  March,  the  line  will  move  to  the  front,  the  guide 
charged  with  the  direction  will  move  on  the  point  indicated  to  him,  the 
skirmishers  will  bold  themselves  aligned  on  this  guide,  and  preserve  their 
intervals  towards  him. 

75.  The  chiefs  of  sections  will  march  immediately  behind  their  sections,  so 
as  to  direct  their  movement. 

76.  The  captain  will  give  a  general  superintendence  to  the  movement. 

77.  When  he  shall  wish  to  halt  the  skirmishers,  lie  will  command  : 

Halt. 

7S.  At  this  command,  briskly  repeated,  the  line  will  halt.  The  chiefs  of 
sections  will  promptly  rectify  any  irregularity  in  the  alignment  and  intervals, 
and  after  taking  every  possible  ad~atitage  which  the  ground  may  offer  for 
protecting  the  men.  they,  with  the  three  sergeauts  in  the  line,  will  retire  to 
their  proper  places  in  rear. 

79.  The  captain, wishing  to  nvireh  the  rkirmishers  in  retreat. will  command  : 

1.  Tn  retreat.    2.  March  [or  double  quick — Mabch.] 

60.  At  the  first  command,  the  three  Bergeants  will  move  ou  the  line  as 
prescribed  No.  73. 

81.  At  the  command  March,  the  skirmishers  will  face  about  individually, 
and  march  to  the  rear,  conforming  to  the  principles  prescribed  No.  74. 

82.  The  officers  and  sergeants  will  use  every  exertion  to  preserve  order. 

83.  To  halt  the  skirmishers  marching  in  retreat,  the  captain  will  command  : 


104  INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  SKIRMISHERS. 

Halt. 

mmand,  the  Bkirmishers  will  halt,  and  immediately  fa 

the  froiit. 

-    lid  Ike  thr  a  1  im    11  to 

I  No.  78. 

To   ChaKOK    DlBliCTIOK. 

86.  If  the  commander  ol  a  line  <>f  skirmisher-  Bball  wish  to  cause  it  to 
■•bange  direction  to  the  right,  lie  will  command  : 

1.  S  .'.  M  >.  ■■■  ii      ,    '•■■•■  h  jui       Mar<  ii.i 

87.  At  tbe  command  March,  the  rigbt  gnide  vrfll  mark  time  in  bin  place  ; 
tbe  left  guide  will  move  in  a  circle  t"  tbe  rigbt,  and  tbat  be  may  properly 
regulate  bis  movements,  will  occasionally  casl  hi-  eyi  to  tb  right,  bo  up  to 
observe  tbe  direction  of  the  line,  and  the  nature  of  tbe  ground  to  be  passed 
over.  The  centre  gnide  will  also  inarch  in  a  circle  to  tbe  right,  and  in  order 
to  conform  bis  movements  to  the  general  direction,  will   take  cat 

steps  are  only  ball  the  lengl  b  ol  t1".'  steps  ol  tbe  guide  on  tbe  left. 

88.  The  skirmishers  will  regulate  the  length  of  their  steps  by  tb 

from  the  marching  Gank,  b  ing  less  as  they  approach  tCe  pivot,  and  greater  as 
they  are  removed  from  it  ;  they  will  qften  lock  >■>  the  m  in  hiog  0  ink,  ■ 
irve  the  direction  and  their  intervals. 

89.  When  tbe  commander  Of  tbe  line  shall  wish  to  resumi  the  direct  march, 
he  will  command  : 

1.  /  !.  March. 

90.  At   the  command   March,    tbe    line    will    cease   to   wheel,    «nd   the 

skirmishers  will  move  direct  to  the  front  :  the  centre  guide  will  march  on  the 
point  which  will  be  indicated  to  him. 

91.  If  the  captain  should  wish  to  halt  the  lino,  in  pla<  ig  it  to  the 
front,  he  will  command  : 

Halt. 

9ii.  At  this  command,  the  line  will  bait. 

93.  A  change  of  direction  to  the  left  will  be  m«de  i  scardiug  to  tbe  same 
principles,  and  by  inverse  meaus. 

94.  A  line  of  skirmishers  inarching  in  retreat,  will  change  direction   bj  i 

"  same  means,  and  by  the  sanm  commands,  as  a  line  marching  in  advance  ;  for 
example,  it  the  captain  should  wislj  to  refuse  his  left,  now  become  tbe  right, 
he  will  command:  1.  Left  wheel.  '-'•  Makch.  At  the  command  Halt,  the 
rkirmishers  will  face  the  enemy. 

95.  But  if,  instead  of  halting  tbe  line,  the  captain  should  wish  to  continue 
to  march  it  in  retreat,  h"  will.ulvu  he  judges  the  line  has  wheeled  sufficiently. 
command  : 

1.  Li  rclnat.     2.  MARCH. 

To   ft  Alt  C  H     B  Y   T  B  i:   F  I.  A  K  E  . 

96.  The  captain,  wishing  the  skirmishers  to  march  by  tbe  righl  flank,  will 
comman^  : 

1.  By  the  right  flank.    -■    March   (or  double  quick    March.) 

97.  At  the  first  command,  tbe  three  sergeants  will  place  themselves  on  the 

line. 

98.  At  the  command  March,  the  skirmishers  will  face  to  the  right,  and 
move  off;  the  right  guide  will  place  himself  by  the  side  ot  the  leading  man 
on  the   right  to   conduct  him.  and  will    inarch  on  the  point  indicated  :  each 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  SKIRMISHERS.  105 

skirmisher  will  take  care  to  follow  exactly  in  the  direction  of  the  one   imme- 
diately preceding  him.  and  to  preserve  bis  distance. 

99.  The  skirmishers  may  be  marched  by  the  left  flank. according  to  the  same 
principles,  and  by  the  same  commands,  substituting  left  for  right;  the  left 
guide  will  place  himself  by  the  side  of  the  leading  man  to  conduct  him. 

100.  If  the  skirmishers  be  marching  by  the  flank,  and  the  captain  should 
wish  to  halt  them,  he  will  command  : 

Halt. 

101.  At  this  command,  the  skirmishers  will  halt  and  face  to  the  enemy 
The  officers  and  sergeants  will  conform  to  what  has  been  prescribed  No.  78. 

102.  The  reserve  should  execute  all  the  movements  pf  the  line,  and  be  held 
always  about  one  buudrcd  and  fifty  paces  from  it,  bo  ;\-  to  be  in  position  to 
second  its  operations. 

103.  When  the  chief  of  the  reserve  shall  wish  to  march  it  in  advance,  be 
will  command  :  1.  Platoon  forward.  2.  3.  March.  If  he  should 
wish  to  march  it  in  retreat,  he  will  command  :  1.  //'  retreat.  2.  MARCS.  3. 
Guide  right.     At  the  command  Halt,  it  will  reface  to  the  enemy. 

104.  The  men  should  be  made  to  understand  that  the  signals  c  r  commands, 
such  as  forward,  mean  that  the  skirmishers  shall  march  on  the  enemy  ;  in 
retreat,  that  they  shall  retire,  and  to  the  right  or  left  flank,  that  the  men  must 
face  to  the  right  or  left,  whatever  may  be  their  position. 

105.  If  the  skirmishers  be  marching  by  the  flank,  aud  the  captain  should 
wish  to  change  direction  to  the  right  (or  left),  he  will  command  :  1.  By  Hit 
right  (or  leftj.     2.  MARCS. 

ARTICLE  THIRD. 

THE   FIRINGS. 

106.  Skirmishers  will  cither  lire  at  a  halt  or  marching. 

To  Fire   at  a  Halt. 

107.  To  cause  this  lire  (0  be  executed,  the  captain  will  command  : 

[  N  G . 

108.  At  this  command,  briskly  rep  meu  of  the  front  rank  will 
commence  tiring  ;  they  will  reload  rapidly,  and  hold  themselves  in  readiness 
to  fire  again.  During  this  time  the  men  of  the  rear  rank  will  come  to  a  ready, 
and  as  soon  as  their  respective  file  leaders  have  loaded,  they  will  also  fire  aud 
reload.  The  men  of  each  file  will  thus  continue  the  firing,  conforming  to  this 
principle,  that  the  one  or  the  other  shall  always  have  his  piece  loaded. 

109.  Light  troops  should  be  always  calm,  so  as  to  aim  with  accuaacy  ;  they 
should,  moreover,  endeavor  to  estimate  correctly  the  distance  between  them- 
selves and  the  enemy  to  be  hit,  and  thus  be  enabled  to  deliver  their  fire  with 
the  greater  certainty  of  success. 

110.  Skirmishers  will  not  remain  in  the  same  place  whilst  reloading,  unless 
protected  by  accidents  iu  the  ground. 

To  fire  marc}* 

111.  This  fire  will  be  executed  by  the  same  commands  as  the  tire  at  a  hall. 

112.  At  the  command  commence  firing,  it  the  line  bo  advancing,  the  front 
rank  man  of  every  file  will  halt,  fire,  aud  reload  before  throwing  himself  for- 
ward. The  rear  rank  man  of  the  same  file  will  continue  to  march,  and  after 
passing  ten  or  twelve  paces  beyond  his  front  rank  man.  will  halt,  come  to  a 
ready,  select  his  object,  and  fire  when  his  front  rank  man  lias  loaded  :  the  tire 
will  thus  continue  to  be  executed  by  each  file  ;  the  skirmishers  will  keep 
united,  and  endeavor,  as  much  as  possible,  to  preserve  the  general  direction 
of  the  alignment. 

u 


10G  INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  SKIRMISHERS.      - 

LIS.  If  the  line  be  marching  in  retreat,  at  the  command  commence  firing,  tun 
front  rank  man  of  every  file  will  halt,  lace  to  the  enemy,  lire,  and  then  reload 
whilst  moving  to  the  rear  ;  the  rear  rauk  man  of  the  same  file  will  continue 
to  march,  and  halt  tenor  twelve  paces  beyond  his  front  rank  man,  lace  about, 
come  to  a  ready,  and  fire,  when  his  front  rank  man  has  passed  him  in  retreat 
and  loaded  ;  after  which  he  will  remove  to  the  rear  and  reload  ;  the  front 
rank  man  in  his  turn,  after  marching  briskly  to  the  rear,  will  halt  at  ten  or 
twelve  paces  from  the  rear  rank,  face  to  the  enemy,  load  his  piece  and  Are, 
conforming  to  what  ha?  just  been  prescribed  ;  the  firing  will  thus  be  continued. 

114.  If  the  company  be  marching  by  the  right  flank,  at  the  command  com- 
menoe firing,  the  front  rank  man  of  every  file  will  face  to  the  enemy,  step  one 
pace  forward,  halt,  and  fire  ;  the  rear  rank  man  will  continue  to  move  for- 
ward. As  soon  as  the  front  rank  man  has  Bred,  he  will  place  himself  briskly 
behind  his  rear  rank  man  and  reload  whilst  marching.  When  he  has  loaded, 
the  rear  rank  man  will,  in  his  turn,  step  one  pace  forward,  halt,  and  lire,  and 
returning  to  the  ranks,  will  place  himself  behind  his  front  rank  map.  ;  the  lat- 
ter, in  hi3  turn,  will  act  in  the  same  manner,  observing  the  same  principles. 
At  the  command,  cease firing,  the  men  of  the  rear  rank  will  retuke  their  origi- 
nal positions,  if  not  already  there. 

115.  If  the  company  be  marching  by  the  left  Hank,  the  lire  will  be  executed 
according  to  the  same  principles,  but  in  this  case,  it  will  be  the  rear  rank 
men  who  will  fire  first, 

11G.  The  following *ulcs  will  be  observed  in  the  cases  to  which  they  apply. 
117.  If  the  line  be  firing  at  a  halt,  or  whilst  inarching  by  the  Hank,  at  the 
command.  Forward— Mabch.  it  will  be  the  men  whose  pieces  are  loaded,  with- 
out regard  to  the  particular  rauk  to  which  they  belong,  who  will  mov,.  to  the 
front.  °  Those  men  whose  pieces  have  been  discharged',  will  remain  in  their 
places  to  load  them  before  moving  forward,  and  the  liring  will  be  continued 
agreeably  to  the  principles  prescribed  No.  112. 
°118.  If  the  line  be  firing  either  at  a  halt,  advancing,  or  whilst  marchi 
the  flank,  at  the  command,  In  re'.rta!  —  MARCH,  the  men  whose  pieces  are  load- 
ed will  remain  faced  to  the  enemy,  arid  will  fire  in  this  positiou  :  the  men 
whose  pieces  are  discharged  will  retreat  loading  them,  and  the  lire  will  be 
continued  agreeably  to  the  principles  prescribed  No.  113. 

119.  If  the  line  of  skirmishers  be  firing  either  at  a  hah.  advancing,  or  in 
retreat,  at  the  command.  By  the  right  {or  l$ft)  flank — Maboh,  the  men  whose 
pieces  are  loaded  will  step  one  pace  out  of  the  general  alignment,  face  to  the 
enemy,  and  fire  in  this  position  ;  the  men  whose  pieces  are  unloaded  will  face 
to  the  right  (or  left)  and  march  in  the  direction  indicated.  The  men  who  step- 
ped out  of  the  ranks  will  place  themselves,  immediately  after  liring,  upon  the 
"•eneral  direction,  and  in  rear  of  their  front  or  rear  rank  men,  as  the  case  may 
bo.    The  fire  will  be  continued  according  to  the  principles  prescribed  No.  lit. 

120.  Skirmishers  will  be  habituated  to  load  their  pieces  whilst  marching  ; 
but  they  will  be  enjoined  to  halt  always  an  instant,  when  in  the  aet  of  charg- 
ing cartridge,  and  priming. 

121.  They  should  be  practised  lo  lire  and  load  kneeling,  lying  down,  and 
silting,  and  much  liberty  should  be  allowed  in  these  exercises,  in  order  that 
they  should  be  executed  in  the  manner  found  to  be  most  convenient.  Skirmi- 
shers should  be  cautioned  not  to  forget  that,  in  whatever  position  they  may 
load,  it  is  important  that  the  piece  should  be  placed  upright  before  ramming, 
in  order  that  the  entire  charge  of  powder  may  reach  the  bottom  of  the  bore. 

122.  In  commencing  the  lire,  the  men  of  the  same  rank  should  not  all  fire 
at  once,  and  the  men  of  the  same  file  should  be  particular  that  one  or  the 
other  of  them  be  always  loaded. 

123.  In  retreating,  the  officer  commanding  the  skirmishers  should  seize  on 
every  advautage  which  the  ground  may  present,  for  arresting  the  enemy  as 
long  as  possible. 

124.  At  the  6ignal  to  cease  firing,  the  captain  will  see  that  the  order  is 


s.  tz  r 


[y^a^ji^B^^i^i^B^ 


H     5* 

■•*«£• 


•>j-S 

*** 

♦  : 

INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  SKIRMISHERS.  101 

promptly  obeyed  ;  but  the  men  who  may  nut  be  loaded,  will  load.  If  the 
line  be  marching,  it  will  continue  the  movement  ;  but  the  man  of  each  file  who 
happens  to  be  in  front,  will  wait  until  the  man  in  rear  shall  be  abreast  with 
him. 

L25.  I!  a  li  lishers  be  firing  advancing-,  at  the  command,  halt,  the 

line  will  re-form  upon  the  skirmishers  who  are  in  front  ;  who:',  tho  line  is  re- 
treating', upon  the  skirmishers  who  are  in  rear. 

12G.  Officers  should  watch  with  the  greatest  possible  vigilance  over  a  line 
of  skirmishers ;  in  battle,  they  should  neither  carry  a  ride  or  fowling  piece, 
hi  all  the  firings,  they,  as  well  as  the  sergeants,  should  Bee  that  order  i 
lence  are  praserved,  and  that  the  skirmishers  do  not  wander  imprudently: 
they  should  especially  caution  them  to  be  calm  and  collected  :  not  to  fire  un- 
til they  distinctly  perceived  the  objects  at  which  they  aim.  and  are  sure  that 
those  objects  are  within  proper  range.  Skirmishers  should  take  adva 
promptly,  and  with  intelligence,  of  all  shelter,  and  of  all  accidents  of  th" 
ground,  to  conceal  themselves  from  th;;  view  of  the  enemy,  and  to  protect 
themselves  from  his  lire.  It  may  often  happen,  that  intervals  are  momentari- 
ly lost  when  several  men  near  each  other  find  a  common  shelter  :  but  when 
they  quit  this  position  they  should  immediately  resume  their  intervals  and 
their  places  in  line,  so  that  they   may  rowding,  needlessly 

themselves  to  the  fire  of  the  enemy. 

ARTICLE    FOURTH. 

Thr  Rally.— To  Form  Column. 

127.  A  company  deployed  as  skirmishers,  is  rallied  in  order  to  oppose  the 

enemy  with  better  success  ;  the  rallies  arc  made  at  a  run,  and  with  bayonets 
fixed;  when  ordered  to  rally,  the  skirmishers  fix  bayonets  without  command. 

128.  There  are  several  ways  of  rallying,  which  tie-  chief  of  the  line  will 
adopt  according  to  circumstances. 

129.  If  the  line,   marching   or  at  a  halt,  b  disturbed  by    scatl 
horsemen,  it  will  not  be  necessary  to  fall  back  on  the  reserve,  but  the  captain 
will  cause  bayonets  to  be  fixed.    If  the  horsemen  should,  however,  advat 
charge  the  skirmishers,    the  captain   will   command,   rally  by  four*.    The  line 
will  halt,  if  marching,  and  the  four  men  of  each    group  will  execul 

in  the  following  mauuer  ;  the  front  rank  men  ol  the  even  numbered  file  will 
take  the  position  of  guard  against  cavalry  ;  the  rear  rank  man  of  the  odd  num- 
bered file  will  also  take  the  positiou  of  guard  against  cavalry,  turning  his  back 
to  him,  his  right  foot  thirteen  inches  from  the  right  foot  of  the  former  and  par- 
allel to  it ;  the  front  rank  man  of  the  odd  file,  and  the  rear  rank  man  of  the 
even  file,  will  also  place  themselves  back  to  back,  taking  a  like  position,  and 
between  the  two  men  already  established,  facing  to  the  right  and  left  :  tlo- 
right  feet  of  the  four  men  will  be  brought,  together,  forming  a  square,  and  ser- 
ving for  mutual  support.  The  four  men  in  each  group  will  come  to  b  ready, 
tire  as  occasion  may  offer,  and  load  without  moving  their  feet. 

130.  The  captain  and  chiefs  of  sections  will  each  cause  the  tour  men  who 
constitute  his  guard  to  form  square,  the  men  separating  so  as  to  enable  him 
and  the  bugler  to  place  themselves  in  the  centre.  The  three  sergeants  will 
each  promptly  place  himself  in  the  group  nearest  him  in  the  line  of. skirmi- 
shers. 

131.  Whenever  the  captain  shall  judge  these  squares  too  weak,  but  should 
wish  to  hold  his  position  by  strengthening  his  line,  he  will  command  : 

Rally  by  Soctiom. 

132.  At  this  command,  the  chiefs  of  sections  will  move  rapidly  on  the  centre 
group  of  their  respective  sections,  or  on  any  other  interior  group  whose  posi- 
tion might  offer  a  shelter,  or  other  particular  advantage  :  the  skirmishers  will 


108  INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  SKIRMISHERS. 

collect  rapidly  at  a  run  oa  this  group,  and  without  distinction  oi' number?. 
The  men  composing  the  group  on  which  the  formation  is  made,  will  imme- 
diately form  square,  as  heretofore  expl  the  bar- 
onets uppermost,  in   order  I                                  on   which   the  rally  is  to  be 

made.  The  other  skirmish  rs  as  they  arrive,  will  occupy  and  fill  the  open 
angular  Bpaces  between  these  fonr  men,  and  successively  rally  around  this 
first  nucleus,  and  in  BUCh  a  manner  as  to  form  rapidly  a  compact  circle.  The 
skirmishers  will  take  as  they  arrive,  the  position  of  charge  bayonet,  th 
of  the  bayonet  more  elevated,  ami  will  cock  their  pieces  in  this  position.  The 
movement  concluded,  the  two  exterior  ranks  will  lire  as  occasion  may  offer, 
and  load  without   moving  their  I 

133.  The  captain  will  move  rapidly  with  his  guard,  wherever  he  may  judge 
his  preseucc  is  most  necessary. 

134.  The  officers  and  sergeants  will  be  particular  to  observe  that  the  rally 
is  made  in  silence,  and  with  promptitude  and  order  ;  that  .some  pieces  in  each 
of  their  subdivisions  be  at  all  times  loaded,  and  that  the  fire  is  directed  on 
those  points  only  where  it  will  be  the  most  effective. 

13o.  If  the  reserve  should  be  threatened,  it  will  form  in  a  circle  around  its 
chief. 

13G.  JXthe  captain,  or  commander  ol  a  line  of  skirmishers  formed  of  many 
platoons,  should  judge  that  the  rally  by  sectiou  does  not  offer  sufficient  resis- 
tance, he  will  cause  the  rally  by  platoons  to  be  executed,  and  for  this  purpose, 
will  command  : 

Rally  by  platoons. 

137.  This  movement  wiil  be  executed  according  to  the  same  principles,  and 
by  the  same  means,  as  the  rally  by  sections.  The  chiefs  of  platoon  will  con- 
form to  what  has  been  prescribed  for  the  chiefs  of  section. 

138.  The  captain  wishing  to  rally  the  skirmishers  on  the  reserve,  will  com- 
maud  : 

Rally  on  the  reserve. 

139.  At  this  command,  the  captain  will  move  briskly  on  the  reserve;  the 
officer  who  commands  it  will  take  immediate  steps  to  form  square  ;  for  this 
purpose,  he  will  cause  the  half  sections  oa  the  Hanks  to  be  thrown  perpendi- 
cularly to  the  rear  ;  he  will  order  the  men  to  come  to  a  ready. 

110.  The  skirmishers  of  each  section,  taking  the  run.  will  form  rapidly  into 
groups,  and  upon  that  man  of  each  group  who  is  nearest  the  centre  ot  the  sec- 
tion. These  groups  will  direct  themselves  diagonally  towards  each  other,  and 
in  such  manner  as  to  form  into  Sections  with  tiie  greatest  rapidity  while  mo- 
ving .to  the  rear  ;  the  officers  and  sergeants  will  see  that  this  Formation  is 
made  in  proper  order,  and  the  chiefs  will  direct  their  Sections  upon  the  reserve, 
taking  care  to  unmask  it  to  the  right  and  left.  As  the  skirmishers  arrive, 
they  will  continue  and  complete  the  formation  of  the  Bquare  begun  by  the  re- 
serve, closing  in  rapidly  upon  the  hater,  without  regard  to  their  places  in 
line  ;  they  will  come  to  a  ready  without,  command,  and  fire  upon  the  enemy  ; 
which  will  also  be  done  by  the  reserve  as  soon  as  it  is  unmasked  by  the  skir- 
mishers. 

141.  If  a  section  should  be  closely  pressed  by  cavalry  while  retreating,  its 
chief  will  command  Halt  ;  at  this  command,  the  men  will  form  rapidly  into 
a  compact  circle  around  the  officer,  who  will  re-form  his  section,  and  resume 
the  march,  the  moment  he  can  do  so  with  safety. 

1 12.  The  formation  ot  the  Bquare  in  a  prompt  and  efficient  manner  requires 
coolness  aud  activity  on  the  part  of  both  officers  and  sergeants. 

143.  The  captain  will  also  profit  by  every  moment  of  respite  which  the  ene- 
my's cavalry  may  leave  him  ;  as  soon  as  he  can.  he  will  endeavor  to  place 
himself  beyond  the  reach  of  their  charges,  either  by  gaining  a  position  where 
he  may  defend  himself  with  advantage,  or  by  returning  to  the  corps  to  which 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  SKIRMISHERS.  109 

he  belongs.  For  this  purpose,  being  iu  square,  he  will  cause  the  company  to 
break  into  column  by  platoons  at  halt'  distance:  to  this  effect,  lie  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  form  column.    2.  March. 

1 14.  At  the  command  March,  each  platoon  will  dress  oa  its  centre,  and  the 
platoon  which  was  facing  to  the  rear  will  face  about  without  command.  The 
guides  will  place  themselves  on  the  right  and  left  of  their  respective  platoons, 
those  of  the  second  platoon  will  place  themselves  at  half  distance  from  these 
of  the  lirst,  counting  from  the  rear  rank.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the 
captain  can  move  the  column  in  whatever  direction  he  may  judge  proper. 

11").  If  he  wishes  to  march  it  in  retreat,  be  will  command: 

1.  In  retreat.     2.  Marco  (or  double  guick — March). 

Uti.  At  the  command  March,  the  column  will  immediately  face  by  the  rear 
rank,  and  move  oft'  in   the  opposite   direction.     A  the   column  is  in 

motion,  the  captain  will  command  : 

3.  Guide  right  (or  Iff  I.) 

147.  lie  will  indicate  the  direction  to  the  leading  guide  ;  the  g, tides  Will 
march  at  their  proper  distances,  and  the  men  will  keepaligned. 

148.  If  again  threatened  by  cavalry,  the  captain  will  command  : 

1.  Form  square.  .'..  March. 
1-49.  At  the  command  March,  the  column  Will  halt  :  the  Bret  platoon  will 
face  about  briskly,  and  the  outer  half  sections  of  each  platoon  will  be  thrown 
perpendicularly  to  the  rear,  so  as  to  form  the  second  and  third  fronts  of  the 
square.  The  officers  and  sergeants  will  promptly  rectify  any  irregularities 
which  may  be  committed. 

150.  If  he  should  wish  to  march  the  column  iu  advance,  the  captain  will 
command  : 

1.  Form   column.     2.  March. 

151.  Which  Will  be  executed  as  prescribed  No.  14  1. 

152.  The  column  being  formed,  the  captain  will  command  : 

1.  Forward.     2.  March  (or  double  quick — March).      '.).  Guide  Iff!  (or  right.) 

153.  At  the  second  command,  the  column  will  move  forward,  and  at  the 
third  command,  ihe  men  will  take  the  touch  of  elbows  to  the  side  of  the  guide. 

154.  If  the  captain  should  wish  the  column  to  gain  grouud  to  the  right  or 
left,  he  will  do  so  by  rapid  wheels  to  the  side  opposite  the  guide,  and  for  this 
purpose,  will  change  the  guide  whenever  it  may  be  necessary. 

155.  If  a  company  be  in  column  by  platoon,  at  half  distance,  right  in  front, 
the  captain  can  deploy  the  first  platoon  as  skirmishers  by  the  means  already 
explained  ;  but  if  it  should  be  his  wish  to  deploy  the  second  platoon  forward 
OD  the  centre  file,  leaving  the  first  platoon  in  reserve,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Second  platoon— as  skirmithers.    -•  On  the  centre  file— take  intervals.    '■).  March 
(or  double  quick — March.) 

156.  At  the  lirst  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon  will  caution  his  pla- 
toon to  stand  fast  :  t!u>  chiefs  of  sections  oi  the  second  platoon  will  place 
themselves  before  the  centre  of  their  sections  :  the  fifth  sergeant  Will  place 
himself  one  pace  in  front  of  the  centre  of  the  second  platoon. 

157.  At  the  second  command,  the  chief  of  the  right  section,  second  platoon, 
will  command  :  SetAion,  right  face ;  the  chief  of  the  left  section:  Section,  left 
fice. 

158.  At  the  command  March,  these  sections  will  move  oft' briskly  in  oppo- 
site directions,  and  having  unmasked  the  first  platoon,  the  chiefs  of  sections 
will  respectively  command  :  By  the  left  flanls—TAk'RCtt.   and  By  the  right  flank-* 


110  INSTRUCTIONS  FOB  SKIRMISHE 

ICjlBGB  ;  mid  as  bood  i  arrive  on  the  aligment  ot  the  first  pin- 

toon,  they  will  command  :  A»  «fctrmuA<r4— March.  The  groups  will  then  do- 
ploy  according  to  prescribed  principles,  on  the  right  group  ol  tin-  left  section, 
which  will  be  directed  by  the  tilth  b<  rgeant  on  the  point  indicated. 

L59.  If  the  captain  should  wish  made   by  the  flank,  the  se- 

cond platoon  will  in-  moved  to  the  fronf  by  the  m  •  Btated,  and  bait- 

ed after  passing  some  > t.'jis  beyond  tfa  •  alignment  •>:'  the  Brsl  platoon  :  die  de- 
ployment will  then  be  made  by  the  flank  according  to  the  principh  -  prescrib- 
ed*. 

L60.  When  one  or  more  platoon?  are  deployed  as  skirmisher.-,  and  the  cap- 
tain should  wish  totally  tie  m  on  the  battalion,  he  will  command  : 

Rally  on  t.  ■ 

101.  At  this  command,  the  skirmish*  . .  ve,  no  matter  what  po- 

sition the  company  to  which  they  belong  may  occupy  in  order  ol  battle,  will 
rapidly  unmask  the  Jront  ol  the  battalion,  directing  themselves  in  a  run  to- 
wards it--  nearest  Hank,  and  then  form  in  its  rear. 

1G2.  As  soon  as  the  skirmishers  have  pai  sed  beyond  the  line  of  file  closers, 
the  men  will  take  the  quick  step,  and  the  chief  of  each  platoou  or  section  will 
re-form  his  subdivision,  and  place  it  in  column  behiud  the  wing  on  which  it  is 
rallied  :  and  at  ten  paces  lroni  the  rank  of  file  closers.  These  subdivisions 
will  not  be  moved  except  by  order  ot  the  commander  of  the  battalion,  who 
may,  if  he  thinks  proper,  throw  them  into  line  ofbattlc  :>t  the  extremities  of 
the  line,  or  in  the  intervals  between  the  battalions. 

]63.  If  many  platoons  should  be  united  behind  the  samj  wing  of  a  battalion, 
or  behind   auy*  shelter   whatsoever,  th  :   rm  d   always  in  close 

column,  or  into  column  at  half  distance. 

164  When  the  battalion,  covered  by  a  company  ot  skirmishers,  shall  be 
formed  into  square,  the  platoons  and  sections  of  the  covering  company  will  be 
direct. d  by  their  chiefs  to  the  tear  of  the  square,  which  will  be  opened  at  the 
angles  to  receive  the  skirmishers,  who  will  be  then  formed  into  close  column 
by  platoons  in  rear  of  the  first  front  of  the  square. 

1G5.  If  circumstances  should  prevent  the  angles  ot  the  square  from  being 
opened,  the  skirmishers  will  throw  themselves  at  the  feet  of  the  front  rank 
men,  the  right  knee  ou  the  ground,  the  butt  of  the  piece  resting  on  the  thigh, 
the  bayonet  in  a  threatening  position.  A  part  may  also  .place  themselves 
about  the  angles,  where  they  can  render  good  service  by  defending  the  sectors 
without  fire. 

160.  If  the  battalion  on  which  the  skirmishers  are  rallied,  be  iu  column 
ready  to  form  square,  the  skirmishers  will  be  formed  into  close  column  by 
platoon,  in  rear  of  the  centre  "I  the  third  division,  and  at  the  command. 
Form  sijmtre  —  MARCH,  they  will  move  forward  and  close  on  the  buglers. 

167.  When  skirmishers  have  been  rallied  by  pla  ctjon  behiud  the 

wings  of  a  battalion,  and  it  be  wished  to  deploy  them  again  to  the  front, 
they  will  be  marched  by  the  flank  towards  the  intervals  on  the  wings,  and  bo 
then  deployed  so  as  to  cover  the  front  of  the  battalion 

108.  When  platoons  or  sections,  placed  in  the  interior  of  squares  or 
columns,  are  to  be  deployed,  they  will  be  marched  out  by  the  flanks,  and 
then  thrown  forward,  as  is  precribed  No.  157  ;  as  soon  as  they  shall  have 
unmasked  the  column  or  square,  they  will  be  deployed;  the  one  on  the  right, 
the  other  on  the  loft  file. 

Uy. 

1G9.  A  company  deployed  as  skirmishers  will  be  assembled  wh^n  there  is 
no  longer  danger  of  its  being  disturbed;  the  assembly  will  be  made  habitually 
in  quick  time. 

170.  The  captain  wishing  to  assemble  the  skirmishers  ou  the  reserve  will 
command : 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  SKIRMISHERS.  Ill 

Assemble  on  (he  reserve. 

171.  At  this  command,  the  skirmishers  will  assemble  by  groups  of  lours ; 
the  front  rank  men  will  place  themselves  behind  their  rear  rank  men;  and 
each  group  of  fours  will  erect  itself  on  the  reserve,  where  each  will  take  its 
proper  place  in  the  ranks.  Wheu  the  company  is  re-formed,  it  will  re-join  the 
battalion  to  which  it  belongs. 

172.  It  may  be  also  proper  to  assemble  the  skirmishers  on  ilie  centre,  or  on 
the  right  or  left  of  the  line,  either  marching,  or  at  a  halt. 

173.  If  the  captain  should  wish  to  assemble  them  on  the  centre  while 
marching,  he  will  command  : 

bit   on   till-  centre. 

174.  At  this  command,  the  centre  guide  will  continue  to  march  directly  to 
the  front  on  the  point  indicated  ;  the  front  rank  man  of  the  directing  file  "will 
follow  the  guide,  and  be  covered  by  his  rear  rank  man  :  the  other  two 
comrades  of  this  group,  and  likewise  those  on  their  left,  will  march  diagon- 
ally, advancing  the  left  shoulder  and  accelerating  the  gait  so  as  to  re-form 
the  groups  while  drawing  nearer  and  nearer  tie  directing  file  ;  the  men  of  the 
right  section  will  unite  in  the  same  manner  into  groups,  and  then  upon  the 
directing  file,  throwing  forward  the  right  shoulder.  As  they  successively 
unite  on  the  centre,  the  men  will  bring  their  pieces  to  the  right  shoulder. 

175.  To  assemble  on  the  right  or  left  file  will  be  executed  according  to  the 
same  principles. 

170.  The  assembly  ol  a  line  marching  in  retreat  will  also  be  executed 
according  to  the  same  principles,  the  front  rank  men  marching  behind  their 
rear  rank  men. 

177.  To  assemble  the  line  of  skirmishers  at  a  halt,  and  on  the  line  thej 
occupy,  the  captain  will  give  the  same  command  ;  the  skirmishers  will  face 
to  the  right  or  left,  according  as  they  should  march  by  the  right  or  left  flank, 
re-form  the  groups  while  marching  and  thus  arrive  on  the  file  which  served  a« 
the  point  of  formation.  As  they  successively  arrive,  the  skirmishers  will 
support  arms. 

ARTICLE   FIFTH. 

lit    DSPLOY    A    BATTALION    AS    SKIRMISHERS,      VN'K    TO     RALLY    Tins     BATTALION. 

'I'n  dtp/oif  (he  battalion  as  skirmish 

178.  A  battalion  being  in  line  of  battle,  if  the  commander  should  wish  to 
deploy  it  on  the  right  of  the  sixth  company,  holding  the  three  right  companies 
in  reserve,  he  will  signify  his  intention  to  the  lieutenant  colonel  and  adjutant, 
and  also  to  the  major,  who  will  be  directed  to  take  charge  of  the  reserve. 
lit  will  point  out  to  the  lieutenant  colonel  the  direction  he  wishes  to  give, 
the  line,  as  well  as  the  point  where  he  wishes  the  right  of  the  sixth  company 
to  rest,  and  to  the  commander  of  the,  reserve  the  place  he  may  wish  it 
established. 

179.  The  lieutenant  colonel  will  move-  rapidly  in  front  of  the  right  of  the 
sixth  company,  and  the  adjutant  in  front  of  the  left  of  the  same  company. 
The  commander  of  the  reserve  will  dispose  of  it  in  the  manner  to  be  herein- 
after indicated. 

ISO.  The  colonel  will  command  : 

1.  First  (or  second)  platoon — firs  skirmishers. 

2.  On  the  right  of  the  sixth  company  —tal;e  intervals. 

3.  March  (or  double  quick — March.) 

181.  At  the  scond  command,  the  captain?  of  the  fifth  and  sixth  companies 
will  prepare  to  deploy  the  first  platoons  of  their  respective  companies,  the 
sixth  on  its  right,  the  filth  on  its  left  file. 


IXS  INSTRUCTIONS  FOB  SKIRMISHERS. 

182.  The  captain  of  the  fourth  company  will  face  it  to  the  right,  the  aud 
captains  of  the  Beventh  and  eighth  i  Iheir  respective 
companies  to  the  Left. 

183.  At  the  command  march,  the  moveme&t  will  commence.    The  platoons 

of  the  fifth  and  etath  companies  will  deploy  forward  :  the  right  guide  of  the 
sixth  will  march  on  the  point  which  will  be  indicated  to  him  by  the 
lieutenant  colonel. 

181.  The  company  which  baa  faced  to  the  right,  and  also  the  companies 
which  have  faced  to  the  left,  will  march  straight  forward.  The  fourth  com- 
pany will  take  an  interval  of  one  hundred  paces  counting  from  the  left  of 
the  fifth,  and  its  chiefs  will  deploy  its  first  platoon  on  its  left  file.  The 
seventh  and  eighth  companies  will  each  take  an  interval  of  one  hundred  paces, 
counting  from  the  first  file  of  the  company,  which  is  immediately  on  its 
right;  and  the  chiefs  of  these  companies  will  afterward  deploy  their  first 
platoons  on  the  right  file. 

?.S5.  The.  guides  who  conduct  the  files  on  which  the  deployment  is  made, 
should  be  careful  to  direct  themselves  towards  the  outer  man  ot  the  neighbor- 
ing company,  already  deployed  as  skirmishers  ;  or  if  the  company  has  not 
finished  its  deployment,  they  will  judge  carefully  the  distance  which  may 
still  be  required  to  place  all  these  files  in  Hue.  and  will  then  march  on  the 
point  thus  marked  out.  The  companies,  as  they  arrive  on  the  line,  will  align 
themselves  ou  those  already  deployed. 

186.  The  lieutenant-colonel  and  adjutant  will  follow  the  deployment,  the 
one  on  the  right,  the  other  on  the  left  ;  the  movement  concluded,  they  will 
place  themselves  near  the  colonel. 

187.  The  reserves  of  the  companies  will  be  established  in  ecbellon,  in  the 
following  manner;  the  reserve  of  the  sixth  company  will  be  placed  one 
hundred  and  fifty  paces  in  rear  of  the  right  of  this  company  ;  the  reserves  of 
the  fourth  and  fifth  companies,  united,  opposite  the  centre  of  their  line  of 
skirmishers,  and  thirty  paces  in  advance  of  the  reserve  of  the  sixth  company: 
the  reserves  of  the  seventh  and  eighth  companies,  also  united,  opposite  the 
centre  of  their  line  of  skirmishers,  and  thirty  paces  farther*  to  the  rear  than 
the  reserve  of  the  sixth  company. 

188.  The  major  commanding  the  companies  composing  the  reserve,  on 
receiving  an  order  from  the  colonel  to  that  eli'ect.  will  march  these  companies 
thirty  paces  to  the  rear,  and  will  then  ploy  them  into  column  by  company,  at 
half  "distance  :  after  which,  he  will  conduct  the  column  to  the  point  which 
shall  have  been  indicated  to  him. 

189.  The  colonel  will  have  a  general  superintendence  of  the  movement  :  and 
when  it  is  finished,  will  move  to  a  point  in  rear  of  the  line  whence  his  view 
may  best  embrace  the  parts,  in  order  to  direct  their  movements. 

190.  If,  instead  of  deploying  forward,  it  be  desired  to  deploy  by  the  Sank. 
the  sixth  and  fifth  companies  will  be  moved  to  the  front  ten  or  twelve  paces, 
halted,  and  deployed  by  the  flank,  the  one  on  the  right,  the  other  ©n  the  left 
file,  by  the  means  already  indicated.  Each  of  the  other  companies  will  be 
marched  by  the  flank  ;  and  as  soon  as  the  last  file  of  the  company. next  towards 
the  direction,  shall  have  taken  its  interval, it  will  lie  moved  upon  the  line 
established  by  the  fifth  and  sixth  companies,  halted,  and  deployed. 

191.  In  the  preceding  example,  it  has  been  supposed  that  the  battalion  was 
in  order  of  battle  ;  but  if  in  column,  it  would  be  deployed  as  skirmishers  by 
the  same  commands  aud  according  to  the  same  principles. 

192.  If  the  deployment  is  to  be  made  forward,  the  directing  company,  as 
soon  as  it  is  unmasked,  will  be  moved  ten  or  twelve  paces  in  front  of  the  head 
of  the  column,  and  will  be  then  deployed  on  the  file  indicated.  Each  of  the 
other  companies  will  take  its  interval  to  the  right  or  left,  and  deploy  as  soon 
as  it  is  taken. 

193.  If  the  deployment  is  to  be  made  by  the  flank,  the  directing  company 
will  be  moved  in  the  same  manner  to  the  front,  as  soon  as  it  is  unmasked,  and 


.1.07 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  SKIRMISHERS.  113 

will  then  be  halted  and  deployed  by  the  flank,  on  the  file  indicated.  Each  of 
the  other  companies  will  be  marched  by  the  flank,  and  when  its  interval  is 
taken,  will  be  moved  on  the  line,  halted,  and  deployed  as  soon  as  the  company 
next  towards  the  direction  shall  have  finished  its  deployment. 

194.  It  has  been  prescribed  to  place  the  reserves  in  echellon.  in  order  that 
they  may,  in  the  event  of  a  rally,  be  able  to  protect  themselves  without 
injuring  each  other  ;  and  the  reserves  of  two  contiguous  companies  have  been 
united,  in  order  to  diminish  the  number  of  the  echellons.  and  to  increase  their 
capacity  for  resisting  cavalry. 

195.  The  echellons,  in  the  example  given,  descend  from  right  to  left,  but 
they  may,  on  an  indication  from  the  colonel  to  that  eflect,  be  posted  on  the 
same  principle,  so  as  to  descend  from  left  to  right. 

196.  When  the  color  company  is  to  be  deployed  as  skirmishers,  the  color, 
without  its  guard,  will  be  detached,  and  remain  with  the  battalion  reserve. 

The  rally. 

197.  The  colonel  may  cause  all  the  various  movements  prescribed  for  n 
company,  to  be  executed  by  the  battalion,  and  by  the  same  commands  and 
the  same  signals.  When  lie  wishes  to  rally  the  battalion,  he  will  cause  the 
raUy  on  (he  battalion  to  be  sounded,  and  will  so  dispose  his  reserve  as  to  protect 
this  movement. 

198.  The  companies  deployed  as  skirmishers  will  be  rallied  in  squares  on 
(heir  respective  reserves  ;  eacb  reserve  of  two  contiguous  companies  will  form 
the  first  front  of  the  square,  throwing  to  the  rear  the  sections  ou  the  flank  ; 
the  skirmishers  who  arrive  first  will  complete  the  lateral  fronts,  and  the  last 
the  fourth  front.  The  officers  and  sergeants  will  superintend  the  rally. 
and  as  fast  as  the  men  arrive,  they  will  form  them  into  two  ranks,  without 
regard  to  height,  and  cause  them  to  face  outwards. 

199.  The  rally  being  effected,  the  commanders  of  squares  will  profit  by  any 
interval  of  time  the  cavalry  may  allow  for  putting  them  in  safety,  either  by 
marching  upon  the  battalion  reserves,  or  by  seizing  an  advantageous  position  : 
to  this  end,  each  of  the  squares  will  be  formed  into  column,  and  march  in  this 
oider;  aud  if  threatened  anew,  it  will  halt,  and  again  form  itself  into  square. 

200.  As  the  companies  successively  arrive  near  the  battalion  reserve  each 
will  re-form  as  promptly  as  possible,  and  without  regard  to  designation  or 
number,  take  place  in  the  column  next  in  rear  of  the  companies  already  in  it. 

201.  The  battalion  reserve  will  also  form  square,  if  itself  threatened  by 
cavalry.  In  this  case,  the  companies  in  marching  towards  it.  will  place 
themselves  promptly  in  the  sectors  without  fire,  and  thus  march  on  the 
squares. 


[end  of  instructions  for  skirmishers.) 


